Cdma 02 Finalsdda

Issue II Rev 4
Section 1
Introduction to CDMA
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
CDMA02: Principles of CDMA
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

South Asia Network Solutions Division
Bangalore, India
Page 1 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 1
Introduction to CDMA
Objectives
Wireless Local Loop
Multiple Access Methods
CDMA Concept
11
Concepts of Spread Spectrum Techniques
13
Basic Model of Anti Jamming System
15
Features of CDMA
17
CDMA Standards-Introduction
19
Frequency Re-Use
21
Capacity of CDMA Systems
23
Applications of Spread Spectrum Systems
25
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 2 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_____________________________________________________________
Objectives
Upon completion of this section, the trainee is expected to be able to:
Explain with suitable diagram the concept of the wireless local loop and
its advantages.
Define Multiple Access methods and explain the concept of CDMA.
List the features and advantages of CDMA.
List CDMA standards.
Explain frequency re-use.
List applications of spread spectrum systems.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 3 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Wireless Local Loop

_____________________________________________________________
Local Loop
The section between local exchange and the subscribers connected to
it is called the local loop. In PSTN, the local loop is predominantly
copper. If it is replaced by Optical fiber, we get Fiber in local loop.
When a subscriber is ON HOOK, the telephone instrument extends a
high ohmic resistance (10~15 K) and low current flows on the line.
When the subscriber goes OFF HOOK, the high resistance is replaced
by a low ohmic resistance (~1000), which results in an increase in the
line current. This is sensed as a call attempt by the subscriber and the
exchange extends the dial tone. We can say that the LOOP is closed.
Thus, for every subscriber connected to the exchange, the local loop is
extended through a pair of conductors. The local loop is made up of
primary cables, secondary cables and Distribution cables.
Wireless Local Loop
If the local loop is extended from the subscribers premises to the
exchange through Radio, the local loop is called Wireless Local Loop.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 4 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Local Loop and Wireless Local Loop
BSC
Wireless Local Loop:

Uses frequencies
PSTN
Local Loop: Made

up of
Primary/Secondary
/Distribution cables
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 5 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Wireless Local Loop

_____________________________________________________________
Limitations of Wireline Local Loop
The copper based local loop as described in the foregoing section has
a number of limitations such as:
High costs of implementation
Longer duration of implementation
Fault Proneness
Long restoration periods
Need for over building (provision of extra pairs at every point
to take care of future growths.)
Advantages of Wireless Local Loop
The Wireless local loop, of any type of technology, has certain
advantages over the wire line, which are tabulated opposite.
Specifically, wireless access to the network is advantageous both for
high density areas where laying of cables is very difficult owing to
restrictions by the local authorities and also remote areas where laying
of cables is very expensive.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 6 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Advantages of the WiLL

Features
Flexible Deployment
Less Investment
Fast Deployment
Improved Availability
Better Reach
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Benefits
Exact location of subscriber is not critical
No need to overbuild
Less susceptible to damage or theft
Low operational and maintenance costs.
Quicker accrual of Revenue
Useful in areas where terrain is difficult or places
where laying of copper is very difficult or not
allowed. ( e.g., central parts of big cities )
Lower losses due to interruptions.
Improved customer Satisfaction
Better Image.
Growth in Subscriber base.
Reliable service in Rural areas too.

Bangalore, India
Page 7 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_____________________________________________________________
Multiple Access Method
We define multiple access as a method by which a number of users
try to access the available medium or bandwidth at the same time.
In a simple way one can say that this determines the capacity of a
network. (If more people can access the network at the same time, we
say that the network has more capacity).
Types of Multiple Access
There are three main types of Multiple Access
1. FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (FDMA):
Every user (or circuit) is assigned a specific frequency slot i.e. a
number of frequencies are transmitted at the same time. This is
being done in the AMPS mobile phone system in the US and
was used in the analog mobile systems in the European
countries.
2. TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TDMA):
Here a number of users access the given bandwidth one at a
time for a specific duration at the same frequency. I.e., each
user is assigned a specific TIME SLOT at a particular frequency.
If more capacity is needed, then we use more frequencies each
with a number of time slots. This is used in the GSM systems.
3. CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (CDMA):
Here a number of users transmit at the same time at the same
frequency. The individual users are identified by a specific code
assigned to them. The code assigned is unique to each user.
The signals are separated at the receiver by using a correlator
that accepts only signal energy from the desired channel.
Undesired signals contribute only to the noise.
The multiple access methods described above are illustrated in the
page opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 8 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Time
Time
30 kHz
30 kHz
Frequency
Frequency
FDMA
1 User/ Narrowband Channel
C/I is negative prior to I.F. filtering and
positive after filtering
TDMA
(3 timeslots shown)
3 Users / Narrowband Channel
C/I is negative prior to I.F. filtering and
positive after filtering
Time
1.23 MHz
DS-CDMA
Frequency
N Users / Wideband Channel

C/I is still negative after I.F. filtering but
positive after despreading process
Can consider despreading as the last "filtering" stage
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 10 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Concept
_________________________________________________________
Spread Spectrum Signal
The spectrum of the speech signal from a user is SPREAD by
multiplying it with a unique code which is at a much higher bit rate.
The resultant signal is called a SPREAD SPECTRUM signal.
CDMA Concept
In CDMA, a number of users communicate simultaneously at the
same frequency. The spectrum of the base band signal is spread
over a wider band by multiplying it with a Pseudo Random Signal.
The CDMA concept is similar to the situation in a Cocktail Party
where all the people talk in the same room together simultaneously. If
every conversation in the room carried out in a different language,
that you do not understand would amount to noise from your
perspective. But the conversations in your language will be
interesting to you. Even with knowledge of appropriate language, the
conversation of interest may not be completely audible. The listener
can signal the speaker to speak more loudly and also signal other
people to speak more softly. CDMA system uses a similar power
control process.
As the signal is transmitted, similar signals from other users in the
area, external noise and other forms of noise get added to it.
The sources of interference in CDMA are:
1. External Interference
a. Background Noise
b. Interference due to users from other cells
2. Internal Interference
a. Other users in the same cell
The dominant source of interference is the self-interference produced
by other users of the same cell.
At the receiving end we recover the wanted signal by multiplying it
with a replica of the code used in the transmitting end.
The capacity of the system is self limiting as the overall interference
level crosses a threshold.
This idea is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 11 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA concept
Spread Spectrum
of Data
Spectrum at the
Receiver input
Recovered Data
Input Data
BPF
PN-Sequence
Back ground Noise
PN-Sequence
External Noise
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Dig.
Filter
BPF
Interfering Spectra

Bangalore, India
Page 12 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
History
Spread Spectrum techniques are developed as a means to combat the
effects of jamming of radio signals. The fundamental question that these
systems try to answer is How can a receiver nullify the effects of
jamming, if the jammer has more power than the transmitted signal?
The answer lies in the White Noise or the Gaussian Noise.
Concept of Spreading Spectrum Techniques
Since the Gaussian Noise has infinite power and is spread uniformly
over the entire frequency spectrum, it is possible to have effective
communication because only finite power signal components can cause
any harm. Hence, the design of anti-jam system is to spread the signal
spectrum sufficiently so that all interfering signals appear as noise. The
signal components (e.g. frequency) are chosen such that the jammer or
interferer cannot achieve larger jammer to signal ratios in the selected
frequency components. Only finite power components of jamming
signals affect communication and effective communication is possible in
the presence of Gaussian Noise. The basic idea is to choose the number
of signal co-ordinates N so that the jammer is uanable to pump large
powers in all of them. N is made large by spreading the signal spectrum
through one of the following methods:
Direct Sequence Spreading (DS): A carrier is modulated by a
digital code in which the code bit rate is much larger than the
information signal bit rate.
Frequency Hopping Spreading (FH): The carrier frequency is
shifted in discrete increments in a pattern generated by a code
sequence. This can be either fast-hop or slow-hop system. In fasthop system, frequency hopping occurs at a rate faster than the
message bit rate. In a slow-hop system, the hop rate is slower
than the message bit rate
The CDMA system used in our networks use the Direct Sequence
Spreading technique. The spreading is achieved by multiplying the base
band signal with a Pseudo random signal (PN Sequence). The
assumption is that the jammer does not have the key to the PN
sequence. Hence, the jammer is forced to adapt the first jamming option
mentioned above which reduces the jamming signal strength in the
actual signal co-ordinates under use
.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 13 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spread Spectrum is basically an ANTI-JAMMING system
Only finite power components of signal are affected by jammer. So,

Effective communication is possible in the presence of Gaussian Noise
The basic idea is to choose the number of signal co-ordinates N so that the
jammer is unable to pump large powers in all of them
N is made large by spreading the signal spectrum through:

o Direct Sequence Spreading (DS) or
o Frequency Hopping Spreading (FH)
Direct Sequence Spreading is used in commercial CDMA systems
The spreading is done by multiplying the signal with a Pseudo random

signal (PN sequence) and it is assumed that the jammer does not know the
key to the PN sequences employed
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 14 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Basic Model
The basic system model shown in the opposite page has the following
parameters fixed:
WSS = Bandwidth of the spread out signal
Rb = Bit Rate of base band signal
PS = Signal Power
PJ = Jammer Power
Then Eb can be got from (PS / Rb) and NJ from (PJ / WSS)
This gives Eb / NJ =
(WSS / Rb)
(PJ / PS)
Where, we define
Processing Gain PG = WSS / Rb
Expressing in dBs,
(Eb / NJ) dB= (PG) dB (PJ / PS ) dB
If the interference in the CDMA system is considered as Gaussian in
nature, then we can treat NJ as the Gaussian noise spectral density N0.
Then we write an approximate expression for the error probability as:
Pe = 1 / 2 * e (Eb / N0)
From the above we can calculate the required Eb / N0 for a given bit
error rate requirement and vice versa. Some examples are given
below:
For Pe = 10-3 Eb / N0 = 7.93 dB
= 9.30 dB
= 10-4
= 10-5
= 10.34 dB
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 15 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PS
Transmitter
Receiver
WSS
PJ
Bit Rate = Rb
Jammer
(WSS / Rb)
Eb / NJ =
(PJ / PS)
Where,
WSS
_____ = Processing Gain (PG)
Rb
The above could be expressed in dBs as Follows:

(Eb / NJ) dB= (PG) dB (PJ / PS ) dB
When the interfering signals appear as white noise, we can approximate NJ
to NO, the basic Gaussian noise spectral density.
The error performance of the system depends on the Eb / NO and the
error probability is approximately given by:
Pe = 1 / 2 * e (Eb / N0)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 16 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Features of CDMA
_________________________________________________________
High Capacity
CDMA offers more channels per carrier as compared to 8 in GSM. In
terms of Erlang traffic offered for any grade of service, CDMA provides
roughly ten to twenty times more traffic handling capacity compared to
FDMA. Compared to TDMA system, CDMA offers five to seven times
more capacity. The increased capacity is also related to the fact that in
CDMA, frequency planning is simpler (because all mobiles within a cell
transmit at the same frequency). In CDMA, the efficiency of frequency
re-use is determined by the total signal to interference ratio resulting
from ALL the users within range unlike in TDMA systems where the
performance and capacity are limited by worst case values.
Lower Transmit powers
The reduction in required Eb / NO means that the MS has to transmit less
power. This means that the cost of the MS comes down and the batter
life increases. This also results in minimum interference; which means
more users can talk simultaneously. Hence more capacity.
Improved Privacy
The PN sequence operation, wide band signalling and certain addressee
specific protection features provide very good security to the users.
Improved Capabilities
The variable rate vocoders allow multiple levels of grade of service.
Interfaces to different data services, ISDN, PBXs including wireless
PBXs and cordless/PCN and cellular systems are possible through a
common instrument. CDMA could also be used in the local loop of the
PSTN, there by making the boundary between fixed and mobile
networks virtually seamless.
Better Performance in Fading/Interference Prone Environment
This is derived from the basic concept of spread spectrum technique
which separates signals based on specific PN sequences. The system
has inherent multi path diversity features.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 17 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
FEATURES OF CDMA:
1. HIGH CAPACITY
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
More Channels per carrier as against 8 in GSM

Better traffic handling capacity
Use of Vocoders increases capacity
Simpler frequency planning / frequency re-use.
Lower transmit powers for the handsets.
2. Improved security
3. Improved Capabilities
a. Variable rate vocoders for different grades of service.
b. Interfaces to ISDN/ Wireless PBXs/ PCN/ Cellular
c. Local loop applications in the PSTN
5.
Better performance in Fading/ Interference prone
6.
Ease of Frequency Planning:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
environment.
Page 18 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Standards - Introduction

_________________________________________________________
cdmaOne
CDMA is a relatively recent technology. The first CDMA standard IS-95 was
published by TIA in 1993. CDMA systems based on the IS-95 standard and
related specifications are referred to as cdmaOne systems. The cdmaOne is
intended to represent the end-to-end wireless systems and all of the
necessary specifications. The cdmaOne provides a family of related
services including cellular, PCS, fixed wireless (wireless local loop) and
satellite communications.
IS-95 and IS-95A
IS-95 is first CDMA protocol hence it is called Protocol Revision 1. IS-95A is
published in 1995 and is referred to as Protocol Revision 2. IS-95A enables
any mobile station to obtain service in any cellular system manufactured
according to this standard. IS-95A describes the generation of the channels,
power control, call processing, handoffs and registration techniques for
cellular system operation. IS-95A does not address quality or reliability of
the system.
IS-95A and TSB-74
An additional specification, TSB-74, has been published that describes
interaction between an IS-95A system and PCS CDMA systems that
conform to ANSI J-STD-008. Systems that implement both IS-95A and TSB74 are referred to as Protocol Revision 3 systems.
ANSI J-STD-008
Defines compatibility standard for 1.8 to 2.0 GHz CDMA PCS systems. It
was published in 1995. It is same as IS-95A. Improvements in signalling and
the inclusion of Rate Set 2 frame formats are some of the variances from
the IS-95A specification. It does not address the quality or reliability of the
service.
TIA/EIA 95
TR 45.5 released IS-95B as its next evolution of CDMA. The standard was
released as TIA/EIA 95. This new revision combined IS-95A, TSB-74 and
ANSI J-STD-008 into a single specification and eliminate much of
redundancy between the three documentation. Analog information was
deleted and the standard will refer to existing analog standard IS-553A
when applicable. TIA/EIA-95 is protocol revision 4.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 19 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Standards
IS 95A
MS BTS compatibility standard for dual-mode wideband spread spectrum
cellular system.
Provides requirements for MS & BS analog and CDMA
Provides requirements for base station analog options
Message encryption and voice privacy techniques are defined
CDMA call flow, system layering, retrievable and settable parameters etc.
description
Mobile station database
ANSI J STD 008
Personal Station Base station compatibility requirements for 1.8 to 2.0
GHz CDMA PCS
Defines requirements for PCS operation and BS CDMA operation
Message encryption and voice privacy
CDMA call flow, protocol layering, retrieve and settable parameters etc.
description
Personal Station database
TIA/EIA 95
It is combination of IS-95A, TSB-74 and J-STD-008.
Analog information is deleted from the standard
Some corrections are made and new capabilities are added
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 20 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Frequency re-use
_________________________________________________________
Frequency re-use
The idea of frequency re-use in cellular systems underlined the need
for accepting a controlled amount of interference in order to achieve
higher system capacities. In order to get more capacity, we need
more frequencies. Theoretically, infinite capacity is possible by
reducing the cell sizes and increasing the rate of frequency re-use.
However, a practical limit is reached when the number of inter cell
handovers required increases rapidly.
In GSM
For example in GSM we can have a maximum of 8 users operating at
the same frequency. If we want to increase this to say 30 users, then
we need 4 frequencies. To minimize interference between users in
adjoining cells, we have to choose the operating frequencies
carefully. This is done by what is called a Frequency Reuse Plan.
Suppose an operator is assigned 27 frequencies. If we choose a 3
sector, 3 cell reuse pattern, then we get 9 frequencies per cell and a
maximum of 3 frequencies per sector. As the network grows, the
frequency planning in GSM (or any mobile network) becomes more
and more complex. The addition of a frequency in any cell or sector
has an impact on the usage of frequencies in other cells.
In CDMA
Relatively, this is very simple in CDMA. All sectors and cells in a
CDMA network can have the same frequency assignment. This is
because, the signals are separated by specific PN sequences, the
following statements hold good. This is called Universal Frequency
Reuse.
Interference in CDMA is pooled
All users more or less experience the same level of
interference from other users
Roughly 60% of the interference is from users in the same cell
Frequency planning from the re-use point of view is not
needed
Capacity and coverage aspects become more critical than the
frequency planning aspects
This is illustrated in the opposite page.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 21 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
a. Frequency Re-use in GSM

B
G
C
A
G
D
B
G
C
A
E
A
D
E
C
A
D
E
b. Frequency Re-use in CDMA

A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A/F
A
A
A
A
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 22 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The primary measure of performance in digital systems is the ratio of bit
energy Eb to noise density NO. Analog signals are power signals, where
as the digital signals are energy signals. The capacity of CDMA depends
on the Eb / NO and the frequency re-use.
(PS / R)
(Eb / NO) = __________ = (W/R) * (PS / PN)
(PN / W)
Where, PS = Signal Power
PN = Noise Power
W = Bandwidth of the system
R = Bit rate (bits per second)
(W/R) is referred to as processing gain
Eb / NO and Capacity
If there are M users and C is the carrier power of any user, then
Interference power I could be thought of as equal to C X (M-1). Then
the Carrier to Interference ratio becomes equal to 1/(M-1).
The relationship between the capacity (number of users), the processing
gain PG and the required Eb / NO is given by the simple equation:
M-1 = [PG] / [Eb / NO]
If M is large, we can say that
M = [PG] / [Eb / NO]
In addition, if we take into account the voice activity factor (v), frequency
re-use advantage (f) and sectorization advantage (s), the capacity
equation for cell site gets modified as:
M = [PG] * [Eb / NO]-1 * (1/v) * f * s
If Rb = 9600 bps, Rc = 1.2288 Mcps, v = 40%, f = 0.65 and s = 2.55
We get the capacity as 107 traffic channels for a 3 sector site.
If we calculate for one sector or an omni site, the capacity becomes 42
channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 23 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Capacity of CDMA systems
The capacity of CDMA systems depends on

o Eb / NO
o Frequency re use
o Voice activity factor
o Sectorization
For M users we have the basic capacity equation as:

M-1 = [PG] / [Eb / NO]
Where PG is the processing gain WSS / Rb
Considering voice activity factor (v), frequency re-use advantage (f)

and the sectorization advantage (s), the capacity equation gets
modified as:
M = [PG] * [Eb / NO]-1 * (1/v) * f * s
Example:
o If Rb = 9600 bps, Rc = 1.2288 Mcps, v= 40%, f = 0.65, and s
= 2.55,
We get the capacity as 107 traffic channels for a 3
sector site
If we calculate for one sector or an omni site, the
capacity becomes 42 channels
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 24 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Indoor Applications
Wireless LANs
Spread Spectrum Cordless telephones, linked to wireless
PBXs
Point of sale applications such as cash registers, bar
code readers etc.
Building alarm systems
Outdoor Applications
Wireless packet switched networks (bridge/router functions)
for Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs)
Campus linking of wired/cabled LANs in different buildings
such as a University or a big manufacturing plant or office or
company
In the access network of PSTN, especially in areas where
copper costs are quite high and pockets where the subscriber
density is less (such as the rural areas)
In high density areas or areas having a high growth rate, the
CDMA local loop is more cost effective than the copper based
access network
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 25 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

Indoor Applications
Wireless LANs
Spread Spectrum Cordless telephones, linked to
wireless PBXs
Point of sale applications such as cash registers,
bar code readers etc.
Building alarm systems
Outdoor Applications
Wireless packet switched networks (bridge/router
functions) for Metropolitan Area Networks (MANs)
Campus linking of wired/cabled LANs in different
buildings such as a University or a big manufacturing
plant or office or company
In the access network of PSTN, especially in areas
where copper costs are quite high and pockets where
the subscriber density is less (such as the rural areas)
In high density areas or areas having a high growth
rate, the CDMA local loop is more cost effective than
the copper based access network
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 26 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
SECTION 2
PRINCIPLES OF CDMA
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 27 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 2
Principles of CDMA
27
Objectives
29
Frequency Spectra of Rectangular Pulses
30
Basics of Spreading Codes
32
Spreading,De-Spreading, Channelization and Recovery
34
The process of Spreading Spectrum
38
Models of Spread Spectrum CDMA Systems
40
One user-One path model of CDMA Systems
40
One user-Many Path model of CDMA System
42
Many Users-Multi path model of CDMA system
46
PN Sequence Generation
48
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 28 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
At the end of this section, the trainee is expected to be able to:
Explain the general spreading and despreading processes in CDMA
List and explain the basic models of Spread spectrum CDMA
Explain the principle of generating PN sequences, with the help of
suitable diagrams.
Illustrate with suitable examples, the properties of PN sequences.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 29 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Since CDMA is based on spreading the spectrum of the base band
signal, let us have a look at the pulse spectra.
Spectrum of a Single Pulse
From Fourier analysis, we know that a rectangular pulse could be
considered as a combination of a number of frequency components. The
frequency spectrum of a pulse of duration (width) Tb is shown in Fig (a)
in the opposite page. The spectrum is mathematically defined by a [(Sin
)/ ] function. This is also called a Sinc function or a sampling
function. The spectrum has a number of null points at frequencies
given by 1/Tb, 2/ Tb, and so on.
Remember that the spectrum in Fig (a) is for a single rectangular pulse.
It is a CONTINUOUS spectrum without any discrete components.
Spectrum of a Pulse Train
Fig (b) gives the spectrum for a periodical pulse train.
The pulse width is Tb, and the pulse chain periodicity is T.
The spectrum still has the Sinc function distribution. The nulls are at the
same frequency points as mentioned for the single pulse in Fig (a). But,
here we get additional components (called power density components)
at regular intervals separated by 1/ T.
It can be seen that the width of the spectrum is a function of the Pulse
width Tb. If Tb is made smaller, 1/ Tb becomes larger and accordingly the
null points in the spectrum gets spread out.
As the period T of the pulse train is increased, 1/T becomes smaller and
the spectrum becomes denser. By corollary, if the period T is reduced,
then 1/T becomes larger and the additional spectral components get
spaced far apart and hence the spectrum becomes less dense.
Reduction of Tb and T means increasing the over all bit rate of the data.
This means the integrity/ semantics of the data is altered.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 30 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spectra of Rectangular Pulses:
Tb
-4/ Tb
-3/ Tb -2/ Tb -1/ Tb
1/ Tb
2/ Tb 3/ Tb
4/ Tb
Fig. (a) Spectrum of a Rectangular Pulse
Tb
1/ T
-4/ Tb
-3/ Tb
-2/ Tb
-1/ Tb
1/ Tb
2/ Tb
3/ Tb
4/ Tb
Fig. (b) Spectrum of a Rectangular Pulse Train
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 31 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
There are two types of code sequences used in cdmaOne systems.
These sequences are known as Orthogonal sequences (Walsh Codes)
and Pseudorandom Noise (PN) sequences.
Orthogonal Sequences
Orthogonal signals have zero-correlation. Zero correlation is obtained if
the product of two signals, summed over a period of time, is zero.
When the XORing of two binary sequences results in an equal number
of 1s and 0s, the cross correlation is zero.
Generation of Orthogonal Codes
Orthogonal codes are generated by starting with a seed of 0, repeating
the 0 horizontally and vertically, and then complementing the 0
diagonally. This process is to be continued with the newly-generated
block until the desired codes with proper length are generated.
Sequences created in this way are referred to as Walsh codes. The
orthogonal sequences used in cdmaOne systems are Walsh codes of
length 64. Walsh codes are used in the forward CDMA link to separate
users. In any given sector, each forward code channel is assigned a
distinct Walsh code.
Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Sequences
PN codes mimic randomness properties. If the current state and the
generating function of the PN code is known, the Future state of the
code can be predicted. In cdmaOne system each base stations and all
mobile in that base station use same set of three PN sequences (two
short codes and one long code). PN code generation is dealt in detail
later in this section.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 32 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

Types of code sequences
Orthogonal Sequences (Walsh Codes)
Pseudorandom Noise Sequences (PN Codes)
Orthogonal Codes
Orthogonal functions have zero correlation
Two binary sequences are orthogonal if the process of XORing them
results in an equal number of 1s and 0s
Example:
0000
0101
------0101
------PN Codes
Two short codes (215 = 32,768)
o Two codes - I and Q codes
o Unique offsets serve as identifiers for a cell or a sector
o Repeat every 26.67 msec at a clock rate of 1.2288 Mcps
One Long Code (242 = 4400 billion)
o Used for spreading and scrambling
o Repeats every 41 days at a clock rate of 2.1188 Mcps
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 33 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spreading, De-Spreading, Channelization and Recovery

_________________________________________________________
Orthogonal Spreading and De-Spreading
The principle behind spreading and de-spreading is that when a symbol
is XORed with a known pattern and the result is again XORed with the
same pattern, the original symbol is recovered. Hence, the effect of XOR
operation if performed twice using the same code is null. In orthogonal
spreading, each encoded symbol is XORed with 64 chips of the Walsh
code.
Channalization using Orthogonal Spreading
By spreading, each symbol is XORed with all the chips in the orthogonal
sequence (Walsh sequence) assigned to the user. The resulting
sequence is processed and is then transmitted over the physical channel
along with other spread symbols.
Recovery of Spread Symbols
The receiver de-spreads the chips by using the same Walsh code used
at the transmitter. Under no noise conditions, the symbols or digits are
completely recovered without any error. But, the channel is not noise
free. So, cdmaOne systems employ FEC techniques to combat effects
of noise and enhance the performance of the system. When the wrong
Walsh sequence is used for dispreading, the resulting correlation yields
an average of zero. This is a clear demonstration of the advantage of the
orthogonality property of the Walsh codes. Whether the wrong code is by
receiver or other users attempting to decode the received signal, the
resulting correlation is always zero.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 34 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Orthogonal Spreading
1
0110011010011001100110010110011010011001011001100110011010011001 =
1001100101100110011001101001100101100110100110011001100101100110
Channelization using Orthogonal Spreading
User Data
Orthogonal sequence
TX Data
1
0
0
1
1
0110 0110 0110 0110 0110
1001 0110 0110 1001 1001
Recovery of Spread Symbols

RX Data
Correct Function
1001 0110 0110 1001 1001

0110 0110 0110 0110 0110
1111 0000 0000 1111 1111
1
0
0
1
1
Recovered Data
Recovery of Spread Symbols using wrong function

RX Data
Incorrect Function
1001 0110 0110 1001 1001

0101 0101 0101 0101 0101
1100 0011 0011 1100 1100
Recovered Data
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 35 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spreading, De-Spreading, Channelization and Recovery

_________________________________________________________
Spreading Example
Three users A,B and C are assigned three orthogonal codes for
spreading purposes
User A Signal = 00, Spreading Code = 0101
User B Signal = 10, Spreading Code = 0011
User C Signal = 11, Spreading Code = 0000
The composite signal when all of the spread symbols are summed
together is shown on the opposite page
Despreading Example
At the receiver of user A, the composite analog signal is multiplied by the
Walsh code corresponding to user A, and the result is then averaged
over the symbol time. This process is called correlation. Note the
average voltage value over one symbol time is equal to 1. therefore the
original bit transmitted by A was 0. You may try to decode the symbols
for users B or C in the same manner. This process occurs in the CDMA
mobile unit for recovering the signals.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 36 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spreading and Despreading Example

Spread Waform Representation of User A's Signal
<-------------- Symbol Period---------------------->
1
-1
Spread Waform Representation of User B's Signal

1
-1
Spread Waform Representation of User C's Signal
1
-1
Analog signal formed by the summation of three spread signals

(The same signal is received by all three users)
1
-1
-2
-3
Walsh Code for User A: "0101"
1
-1
Product
3
2
1
-1
Average = (5-1)/4 = 1
=> 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Average = (5-1)/4 = 1
=> 0

Bangalore, India
Page 37 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Process of Spreading the Spectrum

_______________________________________________________
The Process of Spreading the Spectrum
Since we cannot alter the bit rate of the signal, we use another pulse
train or a code sequence of duration Tc which is a fraction of Tb.
i.e., Tc = Tb/ N
or,
Rc = N x Rb
The code is used to chop the data into a number of chips, each chip
having a duration of Tc.
The ratio Rc/Rb is called the Processing Gain .
Let us illustrate the spreading and despreading process through a simple
example, as illustrated in the diagram opposite.
Let the base band be : 1 1 0 1.
We chop each bit of the data into 4 bits with a PN sequence. The PN
sequence is 4 times faster than the base band data.
The PN sequence for this example is: 1001 0110 1101 0111
The chipping is done by Exclusive-ORing the data with the PN sequence
and the data is recovered at the receiver by passing the incoming data
and the local PN sequence through an Ex-OR circuitry.
Thus we have:
Base band signal ............... 1 1 0 1
PN Sequence...................... 1001 0110 1101 0111
Transmitted Signal............. 0110 1001 1101 1000
Received Signal................. 0110 1001 1101 1000
Local PN code.................... 1001 0110 1101 0111
Ex-OR output.................... 1111 1111 0000 1111
Integrated over 4 bits......
1
1
0 1
We get the base band.
The foregoing assumes there is no Propagation delay.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 38 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
SPREAD SPECTRUM PROCESS - AN ILLUSTRATION
a. Input base band signal
b. A 4 chip PN sequencr
c. Tx. output- a Ex-OR b

d. Rx. input
e. PN sequence at Rx end.
f. Despread or recovered
base band signal.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 39 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MODELS OF SPREAD SPECTRUM- CDMA SYSTEMS

_________________________________________________________
MODELS OF SPREAD SPECTRUM- CDMA SYSTEMS
There are basically 4 models of SS-CDMA systems:
One user- One path
One user- Many paths
Many users- One path
Many Users- Many paths
ONE USER- ONE PATH MODEL
With reference to the diagram in the opposite page, the following may be
noted:
The base band signal of a user j is denoted by........ Bj(t)
The PN sequence used for spreading the spectrum is.... Cj(t)
The transmitted spectrum for user j is......... ............ Bj(t). Cj(t)
At the receiver, the signal is received after a delay Tj.Bj(t-Tj). Cj(tTj)
We generate the PN sequence locally, with an arbitrary delay:
Cj(t-T)
The receiver output is then described by:[ Bj(t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj) ].Cj(t-T)
If the local delay T is equal to the propagation delay Tj , then the
receiver output becomes: [ Bj(t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj) ].Cj(t-Tj) = Bj(t-Tj) i.e.,
at the receiver output we get back the base band delayed by Tj
If the delay T generated locally at the receiver is not equal to Tj
then the receiver output becomes: [ Bj(t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj) ] . Cj(t-T) =
Bj(t-Tj).Cj(t-Tq). This means that the receiver output is still a
SPREAD data.
Thus, all other signals arriving at the receiver appear as spread
data, excepting the desired data which gets decoded as Bj(t-Tj).
The other signals appear as noise.
The foregoing assumes that there is only one direct path between
the transmitter and the receiver and the effects of multipath are
not considered here.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 40 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
ONE USER - ONE PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM.
Bj (t-Tj). Cj (t-Tj)
Bj (t)
Bj (t).Cj (t)
Bj (t-Tj)
Cj (t)
Cj (t-T)
The transmitted signal is a spread spectrum

signal and is given by:
Bj ( t ) . Cj ( t )
Cj is the PN sequence employed by the
user # j.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
The signal arives at the receiver after a

propagation dealy Tj .
The PN sequence Cj is generated locally
at the receiver and used to demodulate
the input signal.
Receiver output isgiven by:
[Bj (t-Tj) . Cj (t-Tj) ]. Cj (t-T)
If T = Tj , then the receiver output is
Bj ( t-Tj ), which is a delayed base band.

Bangalore, India
Page 41 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
ONE USER- MANY PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM

_________________________________________________________
ONE USER- MANY PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM
The single user-single path model helps us understand the concept of
spreading and de-spreading assumes ideal propagation conditions.
In reality, the signal arrives at the receiver through a number of paths,
generated by reflections/ scattering from buildings, trees, mountains,
water etc.
Therefore, the input to the receiver always has 2 components:
a. A direct path component given by: Bj( t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj)
b. A multipath component given by: Bj ( t-Tjm ) . Cj( t-Tjm ),
where Tjm is the multipath delay for the signal from user #j.
Suppose the locally generated PN sequence ( at the receiver ) is
delayed by Tj ( meaning that the direct path signal component is
synchronized by the receiver ). Let us look at the receiver now:
Receiver input: Bj ( t-Tjm ) . Cj ( t-Tjm )
Locally generated PN code: cj( t-Tj )
Receiver output: Direct path component + Multipath
Component
= [Bj( t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj) + Bj ( t-Tjm ) . Cj( t-Tjm )] . Cj ( t-Tj )
= Bj ( t-Tj ) + [ Bj ( t-Tjm ) . Cj( t-Tjm ) . Cj ( t-Tj ) ] ..(A)
The term inside the bracket is the interference signal
appearing as a spread multipath signal.
The spread interference or the multipath signal has a (t-Tjm) component
.
If ( t-Tjm) is LESS than one chip ( one bit ) duration of Cj , the multipath
component cannot be resolved and the demodulated output is distorted.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 42 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
One User- Many Path Model of CDMA System

Direct path:
Bj(t-Tj )
Multi path
Bj(t-Tjm). Cj (t-Tjm)
Interference
( t-Tjm ) less than one chip

Rx
Direct path:
Bj(t-Tj )
Direct Path
Bj (t-Tj). Cj(t-Tj)
Cj ( t-Tj )
Locally
generated
PN sequence
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
spread
mutipath
( t-Tjm ) more than one chip

Bangalore, India
Page 43 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
ONE USER - MANY PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM

_________________________________________________________
ONE USER - MANY PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM ( contd...)
We saw earlier that the received signal has a (t-Tjm) component and that
if it is LESS than one chip duration, then it cannot be resolved or
rejected. The demodulated signal, as said earlier, appears as a spread
interference signal.
However, if ( t-Tjm ) is GREATER than one chip period then it could be
resolved. This could be done by introducing a second receiver which has
its local PN generator delayed by Tjm. i.e., the second receiver is
synchronized with the multipath component. One of the most popular
type of such receivers is called the RAKE receiver.
RAKE receiver
The Rake receiver was developed in the late 1950s in the MIT and was
patented in 1961. The Rake receiver is a set of four or more receivers.
One of the receivers constantly searches for different multipaths and
helps to direct the other fingers to lock onto strong multipath signals.
Each finger then demodulates the signal corresponding to a strong
multipath. The results are then combined together to make the signal
stronger.
Basically, the receiver has separate local sources for MARK and
SPACE, with their outputs connected to delay lines. The delay lines have
several tappings. The incoming signal is compared with the MARK and
SPACE signal appearing at the tappings and the output is combined ,
integrated and passed through a decision making circuitry. By this
method the MARKS and SPACES are CORRELATED with the incoming
signal arriving via different paths and the local sequence generator gets
delay properly adjusted. A simplified representation of the Rake receiver
is shown opposite.
Here, the received signal separated into 2 components:
A direct path component WITH a spread multipath component
A multipath component WITH a spread direct path component.
Output of Rx 1 is given by: Bj( t-Tj) + [Bj (t-Tjm).Cj (t-Tjm) Cj(t-Tj) ] ..(A)
Output of Rx 2 is given by: [Bj( t-Tj) + Bj (t-Tjm) . Cj (t-Tjm) ] . Cj (t-Tjm)
: Bj (t-Tjm) +[ Bj( t-Tj) . Cj (t-Tj) . Cj (t-Tjm) ]...........(B)
The terms within bracket in equations A and B represent the spread
components associated with the direct and multipath components
respectively.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 44 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
ONE USER- MANY PATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM.. CONTD..
Direct Path
Multi path
Bj(t-Tjm).Cj(t-Tjm)
Spread
Multipath
Rx1
Cj(t-Tj)
Multi path
Rx2
Direct Path
Bj(t-Tj).Cj(t-Tj)
Cj(t-Tjm)
Spread
Direct Path
Rake
Receiver
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 45 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MANY USERS - MULTIPATH MODEL OF CDMA SYSTEM

_________________________________________________________
In a real life situation, there would be many users operating at the same
frequency, at the same time. Each user would be spreading the signal
with a unique PN sequence.
The signals sent by each user undergo multipath propagation and hence
would have direct path and multipath components at the receiver. The
desired signal is separated by the receiver by using a local PN sequence
generator as explained earlier.
Also, if the time difference (t-Tj) is greater than one chip duration, then
for each user, the multipath component could be resolved by using a
Rake receiver arrangement.
However, for each user, there would be additional interference signals in
the form of signals from other users operating at the same frequency.
Say there are 3 users p , q and r.
Then for user p, the receiver will have:
A direct path component given by: Bp(t-Tp)
Spread interference signals pertaining to pq and pr.
Components pq and pr are interfering signals from users q and r
received at p. In other words, pq and pr are the CO CHANNEL
interference for the desired signal viz., Bp(t-Tp).
This is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 46 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

Bp(t-Tp)
Bp(t-Tp).Cp(t-Tp)
Bp
pq
T
(t-
Cq
).
q
T
(t
Cp
)
q
Cp(t-Tp)
Bq
Tr )
pr
B(
r tT
r ).C
r (t-
Bq
Cq
Cq(t-Tq)
Br
Cr(t-Tr)
Cr
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 47 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PN SEQUENCE GENERATION
_________________________________________________________
The most important element in the transmitter and receiver in a CDMA
system is the PN sequence generator which is used for spreading and
despreading signals.
Definition
A pseudo random sequence is one in which the bits appear in a random
manner within a specified sequence length and the pattern is repeated
for subsequent sequences. PN sequences have an important property:
Times shifted versions of the same PN sequence have very little
correlation with each other. The channelization of users in the reverse
link is accomplished by assigning them different time shifted versions of
the long code, thus making them uncorrelated with each other. This
property is then exploited to separate subscribers signals in the BTS
receivers.
Examples
Suppose we have 4 digit words. The natural sequence is from 0000 to
1111. Purely random sequence could be a series of 15 word sets, with
the combination of words in each set being random. Pseudo random
sequence would be a series of 15 word sets, with the pattern of words in
any set being the same.
The natural sequence makes the signal highly predictable while the pure
random sequence makes it totally unpredictable and even the desired
signal cannot be recovered.
Hence the PN sequence is the best choice as it appears as noise to all
other users excepting the desired receiver.
Requirements of a PN sequence:
The PN sequence should:
be easy to generate
have random properties
have long periods
be difficult to reconstruct from a short segment.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 48 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The PN sequence is important because, the receiver needs a replica of the

transmitted sequence to de spread the signals.
The PN sequence has a random set of words which repeat after a specific
sequence length.
A pure sequence is highly predictable and a pure random signal makes it

difficult even for the desired receiver to recover the signal. Hence, the PN
sequence is the best choice.
Example of a PN sequence: Consider a 4 bit sequence

0001
1000
1100
1110
1111
0111
1011
0101
1010
1101
0110
0011
1001
0100
0010
The sequence repeats itself.
The PN sequence should

1.
2.
3.
4.
Be easy to generate
Have random properties
Have long periods
Be difficult TO reconstruct from a short segment.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 49 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
Types of PN generators
There are various types of PN generators such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
ROM based generators

Cyclic Shift Register Generators
Counter based generators
Simple Shift Register generators with Linear feedback logic (LFSSRG)
Fibonacci generators
Galois generators
Multiple return shift register generators ( MRSRG)
Non linear feed forward generators.
We will look at the simple shift register type PN generator with linear
feed back arrangement.
The diagram opposite gives the generic configuration which could be
modified to give specific PN sequences.
The generator has a number of shift registers in cascade with tappings
at various points; the tapped outputs are passed through modulo-2
adders (Exclusive - OR) and the output is fed back to the first stage.
For a given shift register length, the feedback connections determine
whether the output sequence length is maximal or not.
It is also not possible to generate maximal length sequences from an
SSRG with odd number of taps.
For a shift register generator with n stages, the maximal sequence
length is given by:
L = 2n-1
PN Offset (Masking)
Masking provides the shift in time for PN codes. Different masks
correspond to different time shifts. In cdmaOne systems, Electronic
Serial Numbers (ESN) are used as masks for used on the traffic code
channels. Masking is used to produce offsets in both the short codes
and the long code. The offsets of the short PN codes are used to
uniquely identify the forward channels of individual sectors or cells. The
offsets of the Long code are used to separate code channels in the
reverse direction.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 50 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
A Generic Form of a Simple Shift Register Generator.
7 .. .....
n
output
sequence.
feedback logic- exclusive OR circuits
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 51 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
Consider a 4 stage shift register PN generator with feedback tappings as
shown in the diagram. Let the shift register be loaded initially with 0001.
Then as per the feedback arrangement, successive clock pulses
generate a set of 15 four bit words in a random fashion. The sequence is
repeated for successive cycles. The output taken at shift register stage 4
is 100011110101100. This forms the PN code used for
spreading/despreading the base band signal. Note that the shift register
should not be loaded with all 0s.
If the feedback tappings are changed, say , from stages 2 and 3, then
we would get a different PN sequence. You may verify this by assuming
the same initial loading of the shift register. Also study the effect of
changing the initial loading.
Note that the sequence length gets reduced if we take feedback only
from one stage or from 3 stages. ( Odd tappings).
Properties of PN Sequences
PN sequences exhibit the following properties:
The maximal length of the sequence is 2n-1, where n is the number of
stages in the shift register.
The number of 1s will be 2 (n-1) and that of 0s will be 2(n-1)-1. i.e., the
number of 1s will be one more than the number of 0s.
If a maximal SRG sequence is added to a phase shift ( time shift )of itself
then the resulting sequence is another phase shift of the original
sequence. This is called the shift and add property of SSRGs.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 52 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
A 4 Stage SSRG type PN sequence generator
4
1
0001
1000
1100
1110
1111
0111
1011
0101
1010
1101
0110
0011
1001
0100
0010
The output sequence is : 100011110101100

It is 15 bits longi.e., L= 2n-1
There are 8 ones and 7 zeros
In any period, half the run of continuous 1s or 0s are of length 1
one fourth run are of length 2, one eighth are of length 3 and so on.
Shift and Add property:
If the PN sequence is shifted in time, the resulting sequence is anothershif of
the original sequence itself. If the shift is by one bit/chip, then the original pattern
repeats after 2n-1 sequences.
Example: Origianl Code: 100011110101100 100011110101100 100011110101100
Code shifted in by 1 bit: 000111101011001 000111101011001 000111101011001
Exclusive-OR sum:: 100100011110101 100100011110101 100100011110101
The original code is undrlined.By shifting the sequence successively by one bit,
it can be verified that the original sequence repeats after 15 sequences (2n-1).
Exercise:
For the same tappings, change the initial Seeding of the Shift Register and obtain
the output sequence.
What are your observations on the new sequence?
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 53 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PN SEQUENCE GENERATORS
_________________________________________________________
The separation of the desired signal from other spread signals is
achieved, as said earlier, by means of a locally generated PN sequence
which is a replica of the one used at the transmitter; the local PN
sequence at the receiver is delayed by an amount equal to the
propagation delay in order to synchronize it with the transmitted PN
code. All other signals (PN codes) are rejected because of code
mismatch. This is possible because the PN sequences exhibit certain
AUTO CORRELATION AND CROSS-CORRELATION PROPERTIES.
Auto Correlation
In general, this describes the extent of likeness between a random
variable and its time shifted version. It can be defined by a simplified
formula:
Auto Correlation = x(t) * x(t-T) dT
For PN sequences this could be written as:
Tb
Auto correlation = Cj(t) * Cj(t-T) dT
0
The Auto correlation function of the PN sequence has a positive value =
2n-1 for zero time shift instances and has a small negative value at other
instances, when the shift in time is equal to or more than one chip
duration.
Cross-Correlation Function
Cross-correlation defines the likeness between TWO DIFFERENT
random variables and could be described by:
Cross Correlation: x(t) * y(t-T) dT.
For a PN sequence, this could be re written as:
Tb
Cross correlation = Cj(t) * Ck(t-T) dT
0
The cross correlation function will have very small negative values.
For our original sequence 100011110101100, the auto correlation value
is 15 and its value at instances other than T0 is -1.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 54 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Auto Correlation for PN Sequences

Tb
Auto correlation = Cj(t) * Cj(t-T) dT
0
Cross Correlation for PN Sequences

Tb
Cross correlation = Cj(t) * Ck(t-T) dT
0
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 55 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
AUTO CORRELATION AND CROSS-CORRELATION OF PN SEQUENCES
Auto Correlation describes the similarity between a PN sequences and
its own time shifted sequence.
Cross correlation defines the similarity between two different random
(PN) sequences.
Example of Auto Correlation
Consider the original sequence 100011110101100. This is compared
with receive sequences with time shifts T0, T1, T2 etc. T0 means zero
time shift or exact synchronization between trans. and receive
sequences. To calculate the auto correlation values, we give a mark of
+1 for every bit that matches with the reference ( original) sequence and
-1 for every bit mismatch. The summary is given below with a graphical
representation.
Reference Code:
1 0 0 01 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
autocorrelation
Time shift 0: 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
15
Time shift 1: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
-1
Time shift 2: 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
-1
Time shift 3: 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
-1
and so on.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 56 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
15
Auto
Correlation
value
-1
t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 0
0 1 2 3 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 57 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
Cross- Correlation of PN sequences
If we change the feed back tappings for our 4 stage SSRG, we get an
entirely different PN sequence. Let us take the fed back from the 3rd and
4th stage outputs with the initial loading as 0001, from left to right.
The new PN sequence is: 100010011010111
We take a timeshifted code from the original sequence
100011110101100 and compare that with the new code generated as
explained above. This would give us the cross correlation values
between the 2 different PN sequences. It is also possible to have the
comparison between the first code and a time shifted version of the
second.
Note that the cross correlation values vary from -5 to +7, depending
upon the extent of similarity between the 2 sequences. The comparison
between the 2 PN sequences is given below and the cross correlation
function is presented pictorially in the opposite page.
Reference Code
2nd Code,Time Shift 0:
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 Cross correlation
100011110101100
1
Time Shift 1:
000111101011001
-1
Time Shift 2:
001111010110010
-1
Time Shift 3:
011110101100100
-5
Time Shift 4:
111101011001000
-5
Time Shift 5:
111010110010001
+1
Time Shift 6:
110101100100011
-5
Time shift 7:
101011001000111
+2
Time Shift 8:
010110010001111
+1
Time Shift 9:
101100100011110
-1
Time Shift 10:
011001000111101
-5
Time Shift 11:
110010001111010
+1
Time Shift 12:
100100011110101
+7
Time Shift 13:
001000111101011
-1
Time Shift 14:
010001111010110
-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Time shift 0:
100011110101100
-1
You may compute the cross correlation value between the first code and
the time shifted sequences of the second code, as an exercise.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 58 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Cross-Correlation between PN sequences

By taking feed back taps from different points in the 4 stage SSRG, we can get a
different PN sequence.
0
output sequence: 1000 1001 1010 111.

Fig.(a). Alternate configuration of the 4 Stage SSRG.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
0 1 2 3 4
6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 0
1 2
3 4
Fig.(b) Cross correlation between 2 PN sequences.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 59 / 425
0001
1000
0100
0010
1001
1100
0110
1011
0101
1010
1101
1110
1111
0111
0011
-------0001
Issue II Rev 4
Section 3
IS-95 Concepts
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 60 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 3
IS-95 Concepts
60
Objectives
62
Introduction to IS-95
63
CDMA Standards
65
CDMA Channels
69
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 61 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
Specify CDMA Channel frequency Assignments
List the major terminologies such as Forward Link, Reverse Link etc.
.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 62 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
As the AMPS mobile network in the US reached its capacity limits,
mainly in terms of frequency reuse, a strong need for a uniform standard
that would make all the existing analog and digital subscribers to coexist
and also provide scope for increased capacity was felt. This resulted in
the
formulation
of:
MOBILE
STATION-BASE
STATION
COMPATIBILITY STANDARD FOR DUAL MODE WIDE BAND
SPREAD SPECTRUM CELLULAR SYSTEMS.
This has been accepted as an Interim Standard (hence the name IS-95)
by the TIA and EIA of USA. The standard ensures that an MS can get
service from any cellular system produced based on this standard. The
standard also contains provisions for future service additions and
expansion of system capabilities without any loss of backward
compatibility to older mobiles. IS-95 is a vehicle for standardization
between MS and base station vendors. It defines modulation, coding,
error detection & correction, message structure and call processing.The
standards are also augmented vocoder service options (IS-96) and data
& FAX options (IS-99).
Basic Terminology
Forward Link:
Base Station to the Subscriber
Reverse Link:
Subscriber to the Base station
CDMA channel:
One CDMA RF pair of frequencies separated by
45 MHz and of 1.25 MHz bandwidth each. .
Code Channel:
The orthogonal communication channel (logical
channels) carried by the forward link (defined by
what are known as Walsh Codes).
Code Symbol:
The output of the encoder.
Walsh Codes:
A set of 64 bit orthogonal codes used for
modulating the input data. Each code is called a
modulation symbol. On the reverse channel, one
modulation symbol is used for 6 code symbols.
ON the forward channel, one modulation symbol
is used for one code symbol.
Chip:
The output digits of a spreading code generator
are commonly termed as chips. A chip is also a
single binary digit. Several chips are used to
spread a single code symbol. Chip Rate is a
measure of amount of spreading performed.
Bits, symbols and chips all look the same: a
single binary digit. What distinguishes one from
another is their relationship with information
signal
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 63 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
IS-95 is an Interim Standard developed for providing standardization
between Subscriber equipment and base station vendors.
It is called the Mobile Station-Base station Compatibility standard for
Dual Mode Wide band Spread Spectrum Cellular Systems.
Defines modulation,
coding,
error detection/correction, message
structure and call processing.
Basic Terminology
Forward Link:
Reverse Link:
Code Chl.
:
Code Symbol:
CDMA chl. :
Base station to Subscriber

Subscriber to Base Station
The orthogonal (logical) channel carried by the forward
link.
The output of the encoder.
One CDMA pair of frequencies separated by 45 MHz,
of 1.25MHz bandwidth each.
Walsh Code:
A set of 64 bit orthogonal codes used for modulating
input data. Each code is called a Modulation Symbol. In
the reverse channel, for 6 code symbols one
modulation symbol is used; for the forward channel,
one modulation symbol is used for every code symbol.
Chip:
The output digits of a spreading code generator are
commonly termed as chips. A chip is also a single
binary digit. Several chips are used to spread a single
code symbol. Chip Rate is a measure of amount of
spreading performed. Bits, symbols and chips all look
the same: a single binary digit. What distinguishes one
from another is their relationship with information signal
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 64 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Standards
_________________________________________________________
Related Standards
IS-3
The original analog cellular standard, now replaced by ANSI

standard EIA/TIA-553 and TIA interim standard IS-91
IS-41
The protocol for roaming within USA, describing how services

should handover between operators
IS-54
The TDMA standard for US digital cellular. A digital cellular

system that squeezes three conversations into one cellular
channel
IS-88
Narrowband Analog cellular system developed by Motorola

that squeezes three conversations into one cellular channel
using analog frequency division multiplexing. First
standardized in TIA interim standard IS-88, and now
incorporated in IS-91
IS-91
Analog Cellular PCS. The TIA version of the analog cellular

standard, incorporating the functionality of IS-88 (narrowband
analog) and IS-94 as well as PCS band operation
IS-94
Inbuilding Cellular. A standard for inbuilding operation of

analog cellular systems using extremely low power. Now
incorporated in IS-91.
IS-95A
The CDMA standard for U.S digital cellular. A digital cellular

system that squeezes between 10 and 20 conversations into
one cellular channel by combining 30 KHz cellular channels
into a single 1.25MHz channel and using code division
multiplexing to combine and recover the individual
conversations.
IS-96A
TIA standard for the variable rate vocoder
IS-97
TIA minimum performance standard for the CDMA base

station
IS-98
TIA minimum performance standard for the CDMA mobile.
IS-99
TIA standard for data services option using the variable rate
Vocoder
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 65 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Related Standards
IS-96:
Speech Service Option for CDMA ( Vocoders)
IS-97:
800 MHz base station
IS-98:
800 MHz mobile station
IS-99:
Data and G3 FAX over CDMA
IS-125: Min. Performance Std. for CDMA speech service Option.
IS-127: Enhanced Variable Rate Vocoders ( EVRCs)
IS-126: Mobile Station Loop back for CDMA
IS-637: SMS for CDMA
IS-657: Packet Data over CDMA
IS-683: Over the Air ( OTA ) Service provisioning for CDMA.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 66 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Standards
_________________________________________________________
Related Standards
IS-136
TIA standard that provides dual mode (analog and digital)

cellular services using the TDMA technology. An
enhancement to IS-54 TDMA, that includes a more advanced
control channel known as Digital Control Channel (DCCH), to
distinguish it from the analog control channel, which although
less sophicated, still digital
IS-634
TIA standard for 800 MHz cellular base-station to switch

interface. Supports CDMA.
IS-651
TIA standard for an open interface between the PCS switching

center and the radio base station subsystem in a PCS
network. Supports both GSM and CDMA
JDC
Japanese Digital Cellular now renamed PDC. Uses upper

900 MHz and 1.5 GHz bands
J-TACS
Japanese Total access communication system. Narrowband

analog cellular FM system used in Japan. Channels are 12.5
KHz wide and signalling is subaudio.
PCN
Personal Communication Network. PCNs are usually short

range (100ft to 1 mile or so) and involve cellular radio type
architecture. Services include digital voice, FAX, mobile data
and national/international data communications. Also a
network of pocket size radio telephones served by clusters or
receiver transmitter cells.
PCS
Personal Communication Service. Within US, the 1.9 GHz

band has been allocated for PCS systems; the allocated
spectrum is 120 MHz wide and is licensed as two 30 MHz
segments for the 51 major trading areas, and three 10 MHz
segments for the 493 basic trading areas
PCS-1900
DCS-1900
EIA/TIA-553 The ANSI version of the analog cellular standard. Generally

one step behind IS-91, without support for NAMPS
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 67 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Related Standards
IS-136
Cellular service using TDMA technology. An enhancement to

IS-54 TDMA
IS-634
TIA standard for 800 MHz cellular base-station to switch

interface
IS-651
TIA standard for an open interface between the PCS switching

center and radio base station subsystem in a PCS network.
Supports both GSM and CDMA
JDC
Japanese Digital Cellular. Uses upper 900 MHz and 1.5 GHz
J-TACS
Japan Total Access Communication Systems. Narrow band

analog cellular FM system used in Japan.
PCN
Personal Communication Network. Short range cellular radio

service
PCS
Personal Communication Service. 1.9GHz band cellular

services
EIA/TIA-553 The ANSI version of the analog cellular standard. Generally

one step behind IS-91, without support for NAMPS
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 68 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Channels
_________________________________________________________
CDMA Channels
The frequency channels for CDMA are derived from the allocations made for
the analog AMPS system. The forward and reverse frequencies are 45 MHz
apart and have a bandwidth of 1.25 MHz each. In the analog system the
channels are numbered from 1 to 1023. The basic systems A and B have 10
MHz band width and account for channel numbers 1 to 666. System A with
an additional bandwidth of 1.5 MHz accounts for channel extension from
667 to 716; System B with 2.5 MHz extends the channel capacity from 717
to 799 and system A accounts for another 33 channels from 991 to 1023.
The table opposite shows the channel frequencies and numbers. The centre
frequency of a given channel number is calculated as shown below:
CDMA channel number to Channel frequency Assignment
Transmitter
Mobile Station
CDMA chl Number

1 N 777
1013 N 1023
1 N 777
1013 N 1023
Base Station
CDMA channel Freq in MHz.

.030 N + 825.000
.030( N-1023)+825.000
.030 N + 870.000
.030(N-1023)+870.000
We now define Primary and Secondary CDMA channels.

These are pre assigned CDMA channels used by the mobiles for initial
acquisition purposes.
The Primary CDMA channel for System A is Channel Number 283 and 384
for System B.
The secondary CDMA channel is channel Number 691 for system A and 777
for System B.
In the table shown opposite, column 3 gives the total number of analog
AMPS channels within the specified band. Column 4 gives the end to end
analog channel numbers for the given band.
For example, if we choose CDMA band in System A, then we get the band
from 824.700 to 825.000 MHz. This accounts for 11 analog channels from
channel numbers 1013 to 1023. If we choose channel number 1020 as our
CDMA channel, then the centre frequency would be as specified in the table
above.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 69 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Channel Numbers and Frequency Assignment
System
A
( 1 MHz )
Valid CDMA
Frequency
Assignments
Analog
Channel
Count
CDMA
channel
number
Transmitter
Frequency
Assignment
991
1012
1013
1023
1
Mobile
824.040
824.670
824.700
825.000
825.030
Base
865.040
869.670
869.700
870.000
870.030
283
311
312
333
334
Primary
834.333
834.360
834.990
835.020
879.333
879.360
879.990
880.020
355
835.650
880.650
269
356
835.680
880.680
/////////
22
/////////
22
384
644
645
666
667
Primary
844.320
844.350
844.980
845.010
889.320
889.350
889.980
890.010
CDMA
22
845.640
845.670
secondary
845.820
845.850
890.640
890.640
890.820
/////////
688
689
691
694
695
/////////
22
716
717
846.480
846.510
891.480
891.510
CDMA
39
738
739
847.140
847.170
892.140
892.170
777
848.310
secondary
848.340
848.970
893.310
/////////
CDMA
22
11
CDMA
311
( 10 MHz )
/////////
22
/////////
22
B
( 10 MHz )
CDMA
A
(1.5 MHz )
B
( 2.5 MHz )
/////////
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
22
778
799

Bangalore, India
890.850
893.340
893.970
Page 70 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Frequencies in the 1900 MHz Band

_________________________________________________________
CDMA Frequencies in the 1900 MHz Band
There are 5 blocks of frequencies specified for CDMA applications in the
1900 MHz band as shown in the page opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 71 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA frequencies in the 1900 MHz Band
There are 5 blocks of frequencies specified for CDMA applications in the 1900
MHz band.
Band
Designator
A
D
B
E
F
C
Transmit Frequency Band

MS
BTS
1850-1865
1930-1945
1865-1870
1945-1950
1870-1885
1950-1965
1885-1890
1965-1970
1890-1895
1970-1975
1895-1910
1975-1990
CDMA Carrier Spacings
1.25 MHz
1.23 MHz
This is the minimum carrier spacing. Actual spacing should be an integral
multiple of 30 KHz and is also dependent on other design criteria.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 72 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 73 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 74 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 75 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 76 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 4
IS-95 CDMA Air Interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 77 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 4
77y
Objectives
79
80
Forward Link
82
Paging and Pilot channels
84
System Access
86
Forward Traffic Channel
88
Forward Code Channel and Supplemental Channel
90
Reverse Link
92
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 78 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
Explain IS-95 CDMA air interface
Explain forward link
Explain reverse link
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 79 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
In US, wireless system operates either in Band Class 0 (850 MHz band) or
in Band Class 1 (PCS band-1.8 GHz). IS-95 system operates on the same
frequency band as the AMPS. The forward and reverse frequencies are 45
MHz apart and have a bandwidth of 1.25 MHz each. The mobile station
supports CDMA operations on AMPS channel numbers 1013 through 1023,
1 through 311, 356 through 644, 689 through 694 and 739 through 777.
The CDMA channels are defined in terms of an RF frequency and code
sequence. Sixty four Walsh functions are used to identify the forward or
down link channels where as 64 long PN codes are used for the
identification of the reverse (up) link channels.
The modulation and coding features of the IS-95 CDMA system are listed in
the page opposite. Modulation and coding details for reverse link and
forward link channels differ.
The cdma system uses power control and voice activation to minimize
mutual interference. Voice activation is provided by using a variable rate
vocoder that operates at a maximum rate of 8kbps to a minimum rate of 1
kbps for Rate Set 1. A coding algorithm at 13.3 kbps for RS2 is also
supported. A time interleaver with a 20-ms span is used with error control
coding to overcome rapid multipath fading and shadowing. The CDMA radio
uses a RAKE receiver to take advantage of a multipath delay greater than 1
s, which occurs commonly in urban and suburban areas.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 80 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Modulation and coding Features of IS-95 CDMA system

Modulation
Chip Rate
Nominal Data Rate (RS1)
Filtered Bandwidth
Coding
Interleaving
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK)

1.2288 Mcps
9600 bps
1.23 MHz
Convolutional with Viterbi decoding
With 20-ms span

Bangalore, India
Page 81 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link
_________________________________________________________
Forward Link
The forward link channels include one Pilot Channel, one Synchronization
(SYNC) Channel, up to seven Paging channels and number of forward
Traffic Channels. If multiple carriers are implemented, the pilot and sync
channels do not need to be duplicated. Each forward traffic channel
contains one forward fundamental code channel and may contain one to
seven forward supplemental code channels.
Walsh Codes for Forward Link
The information on each channel is modulated by the appropriate Walsh
function and then modulated by a quadrature pair of PN sequences at a
fixed at a fixed chip rate of 1.2288 Mcps. The pilot channel is always
assigned to code channel number 0. If the sync channel is present, it is
given the code channel number 32. Whenever paging channels are present,
they are assigned the code channel 1 through 7 in sequence. The remaining
code channels are used by forward traffic channels.
The Sync Channel
The sync channel operates at a fixed data rate of 1200 bps and is
convolutionally encoded to 2400 bps, repeated to 4800 bps, and interleaved
over the period of the pilot pseudo random binary sequence. Each of the
interleaved symbols uses four Walsh symbols. The Sync channel is used by
mobiles to obtain timing and cell specific information. Mobiles must acquire
the sync channel to decode its message in order to synchronize with the
system. The Sync message includes the following information.
Pilot PN Offset
System Time
State of the Long PN code
Common air interface revision level
System ID
Network ID
Paging Channel Data Rate
The Sync channel modulation parameters are given in the page opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 82 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward CDMA Link (1.23 MHz) channel

transmitted by base station
Pilot
Sync
W0
W32
PCH
#1
..
PCH
#7
W1
Fundamental code
channel
Data
TCH
#n
W7
TCH
..
#S
W8
Mobile Power
Control
Subchannel
W63
Supplemental
Code channel
Data
Sync Channel Modulation Parameters

Parameter
PN Chip Rate
Code Rate
Code Symbol repetition
Data Rate 1200 bps

1.2288
1/2
2
Modulation Symbol Rate
4800
PN chips per modulation

symbol
PN chips per bit
256
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
1024
Units
Mcps
Bits per code symbol
Modulation symbols per
code symbol
Symbols per second
(sps)
PN chips per modulation
symbol
PN chips per bit

Bangalore, India
TCH
#55
Page 83 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link
_________________________________________________________
Paging Channel
Paging channels provide mobile stations with system information and
instructions in addition to acknowledging messages following access
requests on the mobile stations access channels. The paging channel is
processed in a manner similar to the traffic channel data. There is no
variation in the power level on a per-frame basis. The 42 bit mask is used to
generate the long code. The paging channel operates at a data rate of 9600
or 4800 bps. A system operator may choose to support less than seven
paging channels. In this case, unused codes may be assigned to traffic
channels. A paging code channel transmits the configuration messages:
System Parameters Message

Neighbor List Message
Access Parameters Message
CDMA Channel List Message
Global Service Redirection message
Modulation parameters of paging channel are given in the page opposite

Pilot Channel
Pilot CDMA signal is transmitted by a base station provides a reference for
all mobile stations. The pilot signal level for all base stations is about 4 to 6
dB higher than the traffic channel with a constant value. Every cell or sector
must transmit a Pilot Code Channel for each frequency is supported. Pilot
signals contain no messages. It is used to demodulate traffic channels.
Also, thre received power level of pilot signal enables the mobile station to
estimate the path loss between base station and the mobile station.
Knowing this path loss, the mobile station adjusts its transmitted power such
that the base station will receive the signal at the requisite power level. The
base station measures the mobile stations received power and informs the
mobile station to make the necessary adjustment to its transmitted power.
Once command every 1.25 ms adjusts the transmitted power from the
mobile station in + 0.5 steps. The base station uses frame errors reported
by mobile station to increase or decrease the transmitted power. CDMA
provides soft handoff. As the mobile moves to the edge of cell, the adjacent
base station provides resources to the call; mean while the current base
station continues to handle the call. The call is handled by both base
stations on a make-before-break basis.
The pilot signals are quadrature pseudorandom binary sequence signals
with a period of 32,768 chips. Since the chip rate is 1.2288 Mcps, the pilot
pseudorandom binary corresponds to a period of 26.66. ms which is
equivalent to 75 pilot channel code repetitions every 2 seconds.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 84 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging Channel Modulation Parameters

Parameter
Data Rate
9600 bps
1.2288
1/2
Data Rate
4800 bps
1.2288
1/2
Code symbol
repetition
Modulation symbol
rate
PN chips per
modulation symbol
PN Chips per bit
19,200
19,200
64
64
128
256
PN chip rate
Code Rate
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Units
Mcps
Bits per code
symbol
Modulation
symbols per code
symbol
Sps
PN chips per
modulation symbol
PN chips per bit
Page 85 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link
_________________________________________________________
System Access
The pilot signals from all base stations use the same pseudorandom binary
sequence, but each base station is identified by a unique time offset of its
pseudorandom binary sequence. These offsets are in increments of 64
chips, providing 511 unique offsets relative to 0 offset code.
A mobile station processes the pilot channel to find the strongest signal
components. Once the mobile station identifies the strongest pilot offset, it
examines the signal on its sync channel which locked to the pseudorandom
binary sequence signal on the pilot channel. Since the sync channel is time
aligned with its base stations pilot channel, the mobile finds the information
pertinent to this particular base station on the sync channel.
The sync channel message contains time of day and long-code
sychronization to ensure that long-code generators at the base station and
mobile station are aligned and identical. The mobile station now attempts to
access the paging channel and listens for system information. The mobile
enters the idle state when it has completed acquisition and synchronization.
When informed by the paging channel that voice traffic is available on a
particular channel, the mobile station recovers the speech data by applying
the inverse of spreading procedures
Basic Forward-Reverse channel Interactions
The following steps / interactions apply
Initial synchronization
Registration
Idle state hand offs
Mobile originated Calls
Mobile terminated calls
Soft Handovers
Authentication..
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 86 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Base Station
Idle State
Busy State
Use Traffic Channels.
System Acquisition through PILOT channel

Synchronization through SYNC channel
System , Access and Paging Parameters through
PAGING channel.
All communications during idle state through
Access and Paging Channels only.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 87 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link
_________________________________________________________
The forward traffic channels are grouped into Rate Sets. A Rate Set is a
set of traffic channel frame formats. Each set is comprised of 4 bit rates. A
rate set may carry voice, user data or signalling. Two Rate Sets are defined
for use in cdmaOne systems. All services provided over the air interface
must conform to one of these two sets. Rate Set1 (RS 1) has four elements
9600, 4800, 2400 and 1200 bps. Rate Set 2 (RS2) contains fours
elements 14,400, 7200, 3600 and 1800 bps. When a radio system
supports a rate set, it supports all four elements of the set. All radio system
supports RS1 on the forward traffic channels. RS2 is optionally supported
on the forward traffic channels. Speech is encoded using a variable-rate
vocoder to generate forward traffic channel data depending on voice
activity. Since, frame duration is fixed at 20 ms, the number of bits per
frame according to the traffic rate. Half rate convolutional encoding is used,
which doubles the traffic rate give rates from 2400 to 19,200 symbols per
second. Interleaving is performed over 20ms. A long code of 242 1 (=4.4 X
1012) is generated containing the users ESN embedded in the MS long
code mask. ESN (Electronic Serial Number) is a 32 bit code that is unique
to each mobile. Each cellular phone is assigned an ESN, which is
automatically transmitted to the base station every time a cellular call is
placed. The MTSO checks the ESN to make sure it is valid, that the phone
has not been reported stolen, that the users monthly bill has been paid etc.,
before permitting the call to go through.
The data is multiplexed with power control information that steals bits from
data. The multiplexed signal remains at 19,200 bps and is changed to
1.2288 Mcps by the Walsh code Wi assigned to the ith user traffic channel.
The signal is spread at 1.2288 Mcps by pilot quadrature pseudorandom
binary sequence signals, and the resulting quadrature signals are then
weighted. The power level of the traffic channel depends on its data
transmission rate.
Traffic channels support user voice, user data other than voice and call
control messages. These applications are defined as service options. The
following service options are supported
8K voice
8K MS loopback
EVRC (Enhanced Variable Rate Coder)
Async Data (rate set 1)
G3 Fax (Rate Set 1)
SMS (Rate Set1) etc..
Modulation parameters of traffic channel for RS1 and RS2 are given in the
page opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 88 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Traffic Channel Modulation Parameters for RS1

Parameters
9600
bps
1.2288
1/2
4800
bps
1.2288
1/2
2400bps
1.2288
1/2
1200
bps
1.2288
1/2
Code symbol
repetition
Modulation
symbols rate
PN chips per
modulation
symbol
PN chips per bit
19,200
19,200
19,200
19,200
64
64
64
64
128
256
512
1024
PN chip Rate
Code Rate
Units
Mcps
Bits per code
symbol
Repeated
symbols per code
symbol
Sps
PN chips per
modulation
symbol
PN chips per bit
Forward Traffic Channel Modulation Parameters for RS2

Parameters
PN chip Rate
Code Rate
Code symbol
repetition
Puncturing rate
Effective code
rate
Modulation
symbol rate
PN chips per
modulation
symbol
PN chips per bit
14,400
bps
1.2288
1/2
7200
bps
1.2288
1/2
3600
bps
1.2288
1/2
1800
bps
1.2288
1/2
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/6
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
19,200
19,200
19,200
19,200
Sps
64
64
64
64
PN chips per
modulation symbol
85.33
170.67
341.33
682.67
PN chips per bit
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Units
Mcps
Bits per code
symbol
Repeated symbols
per code symbol
Modulation
symbols per
repeated symbol
Page 89 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link
_________________________________________________________
The forward traffic channels are used to transmit user data and signalling
information. The forward traffic code channels are separated by their unique
Walsh code assignments. Once a Walsh code in a cell or sector is assigned
to any mobile, the same code cannot be assigned to any other mobile in
that cell or sector during entire duration of the call. A forward traffic channel
can be comprised of a fundamental code channel and supplemental code
channels
Forward Code Channel
The fundamental forward code channel is used to transmit user data,
signalling and the power control sub-channel
Supplemental Code Channel
Supplemental code channels may be used to provide the subscriber with a high
speed data capability. The bit rate of a single fundamental code channel is limited
by the rate set frame formats. A forward traffic channel may include several
supplemental channels to provide the required bit rate. Each supplemental code
channel requires an additional unique Walsh code assignment. The supplemental
code channels always transmit at the maximum rate for the rate set in use and do
not carry any signalling or power control sub-channel information. Supplemental
code channels are a TIA/EIA 95 capability and are not defined in IS-95A.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 90 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Traffic Code Channels
Fundamental Code Channel

Fundamental Code Channel
Walsh Code j is used for fundamental code channel:

Fundamental
Power Control
Sub Channel

Walsh code j+1 is used for Supplemental code channel
Supplemental channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 91 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Link
_________________________________________________________
Reverse Link
The reverse link is separated from the forward link by 45 MHz at cellular
frequencies and 80 MHz at PCS frequencies. The reverse link uses the
same 32,768 chip code as that used on the forward link. The reverse link
channels are either access channels or reverse traffic channels. The revere
traffic channel is further divided into a single fundamental code channel and
0 to 7 supplemental code channels. There are 62 traffic channels and up to
32 access channels.
Access Channel
The access channel is used by mobile station to communicate with
nontraffic information, such as originating calls and responding to paging.
The access rate is fixed at 4800 bps. All mobile stations accessing a radio
system share the same frequency assignment. Each access channel is
identified by a distinct access-channel long-code sequence having an
access number, a paging channel number associated with the access
channel and other system data. Each mobile station uses a different PN
code; therefore the radio system can correctly decode the information from
an individual mobile station. The data transmitted on reverse channel is
grouped into 20 ms frames. All data on the reverse channel is
convolutionally encoded, block interleaved and modulated by modulation
symbols transmitted for each 6 code symbols. The modulation symbol is
one of 64 mutually orthogonal waveforms that are generated using Walsh
functions.
Traffic Channel
The reverse traffic channel may use one of 9600,4800,2400 or 1200 bps
data rates for transmission. The actual burst transmission rate is fixed at
28,800 code symbols per second. Since 6 code symbols are modulated as
one of 64 modulation symbols for transmission, the modulation symbol
transmission rate is fixed at 4800 symbols per second. This results in fixed
Walsh chip rate of 307.2 kilo-chips per second. The rate of spreading PN
sequence is fixed at 1.2288 Mcps so that each Walsh chip is spread by 4
PN chips.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 92 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Channels
Shared by all users
Aloha type contention process
Speed 4800 BPS
Equivalent to RACH in GSM
Used for call initiation, paging response and registration with the
system (like location updates )
Ack for access is via paging channel.
Congestion Back off facility available.
Traffic Channels
Unique Sub addressing through Long Codes
242 addresses possible.
Speed upto 9600 BPS
20 msec frames
Use in band signalling with messages interleaved with speech.
Reverse Link Channelziation
Reverse CDMA Channels
Access
Chl 1
Access
Chl n
Traffic
Chl 1
Access Channels:
Speed 4800 BPS
Like RACH in GSM
Originate calls / respond to pages
Used for registration with the system
Use Aloha like contention
Provide congestion back offs
Ack for access through paging channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Traffic
Chl 2
Traffic
Chl n
Reverse Traffic Channel:

Unique LOng code for sub addressing
242 addresses possible
20 msec frames
carry speech and data
speeds upto 9600 BPS
Use in band signalling with messages
interleaved with speech signals.

Bangalore, India
Page 93 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 5
THE REVERSE CHANNEL
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 94 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 5
The Reverse Channel
94
Objectives
96
Reverse Channel
97
Reverse channel structure
99
Convolutional coding
101
Block Interleaving
103
Orthogonal Modulation
109
Walsh code look up table
111
Data burst Randomizer
113
The Reverse channel-Spreading Methods
115
Frame structure
117
Reverse Channel-Traffic frames
119
Demodulation of Reverse channel
121
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 95 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
Specify different classes of mobiles/hand sets.
Explain the idea of controlled output power and gated output power.
Explain the Reverse channel structure.
With reference to the block schematic of the reverse channel, explain
the functions of each block.
Explain the read-write operations in the block interleaver
Explain how orthogonal codes are generated.
Outline the concepts of Power control groups, data burst
randomization and long codes.
Detail the frame structures of the reverse channel.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 96 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Reverse Channel

_________________________________________________________
Mobile / Handset Power Limits
The maximum output power is specified for 3 different classes of handsets.
Mobile Station Class
ERP shall Exceed
I
II
III
1 dBW ( 1.25 watts )

-3 dBW ( 0.5 watt )
-7 dBW ( 0.2 watt )
ERP shall NOT

Exceed.
8 dBW ( 6.3 watts )
4 dBW ( 2.5 watts )
0 dBW ( 1.0 watt )
All power levels are with reference to the antenna connector point, unless
otherwise specified.
The power output of the handset is controlled either in the open loop
Power Control method - here the mobile estimates the control required and
adjusts its own power output- or the closed loop Power Control method
where both the mobile and the base station are involved in the power
control mechanism. The Power control mechanism is described in detail in a
separate section later.
Minimum Controlled Output Power
With both the open loop and closed loop power control methods, the mean
output of the handset should be less than - 50 dBm/1.23 MHz i.e., -111
dBm/Hz. Implementing the power control methods in CDMA is very useful in
reducing the near-far interferences. If all the mobiles within the coverage of
a cell have their power controlled, then the total signal power received at the
cell from all such mobiles would equal the nominal receive power times the
number of mobiles.
Gated Output Power
The hand set shall transmit a nominal controlled power during gated
periods. A typical output in a gated period is shown in the diagram opposite.
The transmitter noise floor should be better than -60 dBm. During the OFF
portions of the gated transmission, the handset should reduce the power
either by 20 dB min. or to the noise floor level, whichever is greater.
For example, if the gated on period power is say .5 watt. i.e., 27 dBm. Then
the gated off period power will be 7 dBm, being greater than the noise floor
level.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 97 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Reverse Channel

Mobile/ handset Output Power Limits
All Power outputs are with reference to the antenna connector points.
Mobile Power is controlled either by Open Loop ( Mobile estimated ) or by
Closed Loop ( involves both the mobile and the base station ).
The power control helps eliminate the near-far interferences.
Typical output of the handset is defined by a mask shown below:
Mean output power

of the ensemble
average.
( reference line
6 micro
seconds
20 dB or
to the
Noise Floor
3 dB
1.25 mSec
Transmission Envelope Mask - Average Gated-on Power Control Group
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 98 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Reverse Channel Structure

_________________________________________________________
The Reverse Channel Structure
The Reverse Channel structure is shown in the diagram opposite.
The data is transmitted
In 20 msec frames.
The data is convolutionally coded.
Block interleaved
Subject to 64-ary orthogonal Modulation
Direct Sequence spread prior to actual transmission.
The reverse channel data comes in sizes of 172/80/40/16 bits per frame.
To this we add Frame Quality Indicators ( for 4800 and 9600 bit rates )
and 8 Encoder Tail Bits. This will give transmit data rates of 9600,
4800,2400 and 1200 BPS. The traffic channels may use any of these
rates while the Access channel uses only 4800 BPS speed.
The duty cycle of the transmitted data varies with the data rate. For 9600
it is 100% and for 1200 it is 12.5%. It varies by 50% for each speed.
The burst transmission rate is fixed at 28,800 code symbols per
second.
6 code symbols are modulated as ONE of 64 modulation
symbols (Walsh Code ).
The modulation symbol rate, therefore is 28,8006 = 4800 mod.
symbols per second.
This results in a Walsh Chip Rate of 4800x64 = 307.2 kcps.
Each Walsh chip is spread by 4 PN chips.
Hence the net rate of the spreading PN sequence is 307.2x4 =
1.2288 Mcps.
The figures are identical for the access channel except that the bit rate is
fixed at 4800 BPS after adding the tail bits. Each code symbol is
repeated once, to get 9600 bit rate and the duty cycle is 100%.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 99 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA Reverse Channel Structure

Traffic Channel
Info bits
Add Frame
172/80/40/16
i/p Quality
Add 8 bit
bits per frame
Indicators for
Encoder
8.6 kbps 9600 & 4800
Tail
4.0 kbps BPS rates
2.0 kbps
9.2 kbps
0.8 kbps
4.4 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Convolutional
Encoder
r=1/3; k=9
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
Code Symbol
Symbol
Repetition
Block
Interleaver
28.8 kbps
28.8 kbps
14.4 kbps
7.2 kbps
3.6 kbps
28.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Frame Data rate
Modulation symbol
Walsh Chip
Base band
Filter
+
64-ary
Orthogonal
Modulator
Data Burst
Randomiser
4.8 ksps
307.2 kcps
+
PN Chip
1. 2288
Mcps
Long Code
Generator
I - Channel Sequence
1. 2288 Mcps
Delay= Tc/ 2
406.9 nSec
cos ( wct )
o/p
+
Base band
Filter
Q - Channel Sequence
1. 2288 Mcps
sin( wct )
Long code Mask
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 100 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Convolutional Coding
_________________________________________________________
Convolutional Coding
Covolutional coding is an FEC method to achieve required signal to
noise ratio necessary to achieve acceptable error rate. Convolutional
Coding involves modulo-2 addition (Exclusive-OR) of select tappings
from a serially delayed data sequence as shown in the diagram. The
data sequence delay is equal to K-1, where K is the constraint length of
the encoder. The handset convolutionally encodes the reverse traffic and
access channels prior to interleaving. The convolutional encoder of rate
1/3 and has a constraint length of 9 is used for Rate Set 1 Vocoder.
When Rate Set 2 is in use, a rate 1/2 code is used.
For 1/3 rate convolutional coder, for every input data bit, the encoder
gives 3 output bits. The coder has 3 modulo-2 adders defined by what
are known as generating polynomials g0,g1 and g2. The output is
available at C0, C1 and C2.
Convolutional coding enables the system to work at a much lower values
of Eb/N0 for the same level of performance. For example, if we need an
Eb/N0 of 10 dB for a BER of 10-6, then we can get the same level of
performance at an Eb/N0 of say, 7-8 dB, if convolutional coding is used.
That is why almost all radio mobile systems use Convolutional (channel)
coding.
Code Symbol Repetition
If the data rate is less than 9600 bps, then the output of the
convolutional coder is passed through a code symbol repeater. 4800 bps
is repeated once ( each symbol occurs 2 times ), 2400 is repeated 3
times ( each symbol occurs 4 times ) and so on. The repeated symbols
are input to the interleaver and all BUT ONE of the code symbol
repetitions are DELETED PRIOR to transmission.
However, for the Access channel which has a fixed bit rate of 4800 bps,
the symbols are repeated once and BOTH the repeated code symbols
are transmitted.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 101 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Channel
Traffic Channel
Info bits
172/80/40/16
bits per frame
8.6
4.0
2.0
0.8
Code Symbol
i/p
kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
Add Frame
Quality
Indicators for
9600 & 4800
BPS rates
Add 8 bit
Encoder
Tail
9.2
4.4
2.0
0.8
kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
Convolutional
Encoder
r=1/3; k=9
9.6
4.8
2.4
1.2
kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
Code Symbol
Symbol
Repetition
28.8
14.4
7.2
3.6
Block
Interleaver
28.8 kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
Code Symbol
28.8 kbps
Frame Data rate

Modulation symbol
Walsh Chip
Base band
Filter
+
64-ary
Orthogonal
Modulator
Data Burst
Randomiser
+
PN Chip
1. 2288
Mcps
4.8 ksps
307.2 kcps
Long Code
Generator
1. 2288 Mcps
Delay= T c / 2
406.9 nSec
cos ( w c t )
o/p
Base band
Filter
1. 2288 Mcps
sin( w c t )
Long code Mask
g0
C0
+
Code
Sumbols.
Output
Info bits
input
+
g1
C1
+
g2
C2
Block Schematic of a 1/3 rate Convolutional Encoder.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 102 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Block Interleaving
______________________________________________________
Block Interleaving
Just as in GSM, the data is interleaved, to protect it against noise bursts.
However, in CDMA, the interleaving algorithm is different for different
data rates. The interleaver is basically an array of 32 ROWs and 18
COLUMNs. The data (code symbols, including the repeated symbols) is
WRITTEN into the array by COLUMNs and read out by ROWs. Block
interleaving is performed over the span of one traffic channel frame.
Interleaver Write Operation
The interleaver array format for 9600 bps is given in the Table opposite.
The write sequences for 4800 bps (which includes the Access channel
also), 2400 and 1200 bps are shown in Tables on the next 2 pages. For
these speeds, the columns are repeated as many times as the data was
repeated. For example, at 4800 bps, the data was repeated once; the
first 2 rows of column 1 are numbered 1, the next 2 rows of column 1 are
numbered 2 and so on. For this speed, you will find that the 2 rows are
identical, leaving 16 such sets. For 2400 bps, 4 rows would be identical
and for 1200 bps, 8 rows would be identical.
Interleaver Read Operation
As said earlier, the data is read out of the interleaver by the rows.
The read sequence varies with data rate.
For 9600 bps, the read sequence is:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31 32
For 4800, the sequence is:
1 3 2 4 5 7 6 8 9 11 10 12 13 15 14 16 17 19 18 20 21 23 22 24 25
27 26 28 29 31 30 32
For 2400 bps, the sequence is:
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 13 10 14 11 15 12 16 17 21 18 22 19 23 20 24 25
29 26 30 27 31 28 32
At 1200 bps, the sequence is:
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 17 25 18 26 19 27 20 28 21
29 22 30 23 31 24 32
For the Access channel, the sequence is different, though at 4800
bps.
1 17 9 25 5 21 13 29 3 19 11 27 7 23 15 31 2 18 10 26 6 22 14 30 4
29 12 28 8 24 16 32
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 103 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Block Interleaving
Traffic Channel
Info bits
172/80/40/16
i/p
bits per frame
8.6 kbps
4.0 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Add Frame
Quality
Indicators for
9600 & 4800
BPS rates
Add 8 bit
Encoder
Tail
9.2 kbps
4.4 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Convolutional
Encoder
r=1/3; k=9
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
Code Symbol
Symbol
Repetition
Block
Interleaver
28.8 kbps
28.8 kbps
14.4 kbps
7.2 kbps
3.6 kbps
Code Symbol
28.8 kbps
Frame Data rate

Modulation symbol
Walsh Chip
Base band
Filter
+
64-ary
Orthogonal
Modulator
Data Burst
Randomiser
+
PN Chip
1. 2288
Mcps
4.8 ksps
307.2 kcps
1. 2288 Mcps
Long Code
Generator
Delay= Tc/ 2
406.9 nSec
cos ( wct )
o/p
Base band
Filter
sin( wct )
1. 2288 Mcps
Long code Mask
Block Interleaving Algorithm for 9600 bps rate

Data is written into the array by columns.
Data is read out of the array by rows.
The rows are repeated while writing by the number of times the data
was repeated by the symbol repeater.
The read sequence is different for different data rates and for the
Access Channel.
Columns 1 to 18
Row
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
.....
.....
.....
.....
32
1
2
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
32
33
34
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
64
65
66
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
96
97
98
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
128
129
130
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
160
161
162
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
192
193
194
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
224
225
226
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
256
257
258
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
288
289
290
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
320
321
322
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
352
353
354
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
384
385
386
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
416
417
418
....
....
....
....
....
....
448
449
450
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
480
481
482
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
512
513
514
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
544
545
546
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
576
At 9600, the data is read out row by row continuously.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 104 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Block Interleaver
_________________________________________________________
Block Interleaver writing Algorithm For 4800 bps rate
Refer to table 1for 4800 bps rate block interleaver algorithm
Block Interleaver writing Algorithm for 2400 bps
Refer to table 2for 2400 bps rate block interleaver algorithm
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 105 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Table 1
1
2
3
4
....
....
31
32
1
1
1
2
2
....
....
16
16
2
17
17
18
18
.....
.....
32
32
3
33
33
34
34
.....
.....
48
48
4
49
49
50
50
.....
.....
64
64
5
65
65
66
66
.....
.....
80
80
6
81
81
82
82
.....
.....
96
96
7
97
97
98
98
.....
.....
112
112
8
113
113
114
114
.....
.....
128
128
9
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
10
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
11
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
12
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
13
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
14
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
15
....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
16
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
17
18
257 273
257 273
258 274
258 274
..... .....
..... .....
272 288
272 288
4
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
...
...
...
...
...
...
32
32
32
32
5
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
...
...
...
...
...
...
40
40
40
40
6
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
7
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
8
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
9
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
11
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
12
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
13
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
14
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
15
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
16
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
17
129
129
129
129
130
130
130
130
...
...
...
...
...
...
136
136
136
136
Table 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.....
.....
.....
....
.....
.....
29
30
31
32
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
...
...
...
...
...
...
8
8
8
8
2
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
...
...
...
...
...
...
16
16
16
16
3
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
...
...
...
...
...
...
24
24
24
24
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 106 / 425
18
137
137
137
137
138
138
138
138
...
...
...
...
...
...
144
144
144
144
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Channel
________________________________________________________
Block Interleaving for 1200 bps
Refer to page opposite for 1200 bps block interleaver algorithm
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 107 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Table 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
...
...
...
...
...
...
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
...
...
...
...
...
...
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
...
...
...
...
...
...
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
...
...
...
...
...
...
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
4
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
5
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
6
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
7
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
8
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
9
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
11
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
12
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...

Bangalore, India
13
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
14
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
15
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
16
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Page 108 / 425
17
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
65
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
18
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
...
...
...
...
...
...
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
The base station must demodulate the mobile transmission noncoherently. To improve non-coherent demodulation, Orthogonal
Modulation scheme is employed. In this technique, instead of
transmitting antipodal signal +1 and 1, a set of orthogonal signals will
be used. The signal duration should be as long as possible but not
longer than the coherence time of the channel (the time frame during
which the channel is relatively stable). Walsh codes are used for this
purpose. On the forward link, the Walsh codes isolated one scriber from
another. In reverse link, the Walsh codes will provide isolation between
symbols. The orthogonal signalling set contains 64 possible signals. The
information to be modulated is segregated into groups of 6 symbols.
These 6 symbols then correspond to a value from 0 to 63. This value is
used to select a Walsh code for transmission.
Orthogonal Modulator
The output of the block interleaver is passed through the 64-ary
Orthogonal Modulator. The orthogonal codes are generated according to
a recursive matrix form defined below:
H1 = 0;
H4 = 00 00
01 01
00 11
01 10
Or, in general,
H2n = Hn Hn
Hn Hn
H2 = 0 0
01
where n is a power of 2.
The modulation symbol has a rate of 4800 symbols per second and the
duration of each modulation symbol is 1/4800; i.e., 208.333... sec. The
time associated with 1/64 th of the modulation symbol is called the Walsh
Chip and is equal to 1/307200 sec; i.e., 3.255 Sec. The code symbols
are taken in 6 bit blocks and converted into corresponding decimal
number. From the Walsh code look up table, a 64 bit Walsh code
corresponding to this decimal number is output.
The Walsh Code Look up Table is given in the next pages.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 109 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Traffic Channel
Info bits
172/80/40/16
bits per frame i/p
8.6 kbps
4.0 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Add Frame
Quality
Indicators for
9600 & 4800
BPS rates
Add 8 bit
Encoder
Tail
Convolutional
Encoder
r=1/3; k=9
Symbol
Repetition
Block
Interleaver
28.8 kbps
28.8 kbps
14.4 kbps
7.2 kbps
3.6 kbps
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
9.2 kbps
4.4 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Code Symbol
28.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Frame Data rate
Modulation symbol
Walsh Chip
Base band
Filter
+
64-ary
Orthogonal
Modulator
Data Burst
Randomiser
4.8 ksps
307.2 kcps
+
PN Chip
1. 2288
Mcps
Long Code
Generator
1. 2288 Mcps
1. 2288 Mcps
Delay= Tc/ 2
406.9 nSec
cos ( wct )
o/p
Base band
Filter
sin( wct )
Long code Mask
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 110 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Code Lookup Table

_________________________________________________________
Walsh code Lookup table
For example for the input code of 100010, Walsh Code no 34 is sent for
an input of 101101, Walsh code number 57 is sent and so on.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 111 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Code Lookup Table

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
0000 0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0101 0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0011 0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0110 0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
1111 0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
1010 0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
1100 0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0000 1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
0000
0101 1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
0101
0011 1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
0011
0110 1001
1001
0110
0110
1001
1001
0110
0110
1111 1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
1010 1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
1100 1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
1 0 01
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
0000 0000
0000
1111
1111
1111
1111
0000
0000
0101 0101
0101
1010
1010
1010
1010
0101
0101
0011 0011
0011
1100
1100
1100
1100
0011
0011
0110 0110
0110
1001
1001
1001
1001
0110
0110
1111 0000
1111
1111
0000
1111
0000
0000
1111
1010 0101
1010
1010
0101
1010
0101
0101
1010
1100 0011
1100
1100
0011
1100
0011
0011
1100
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
0000 1111
1111
1111
1111
0000
0000
0000
0000
0101 1010
1010
1010
1010
0101
0101
0101
0101
0011 1100
1100
1100
1100
0011
0011
0011
0011
0110 1001
1001
1001
1001
0110
0110
0110
0110
1111 1111
0000
1111
0000
0000
1111
0000
1111
1010 1010
0101
1010
0101
0101
1010
0101
1010
1100 1100
0011
1100
0011
0011
1100
0011
1100
1 0 01
1001
0110
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0000 0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
0101 0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
1010
1010
0011 0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
1100
1100
0110 0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
1001
1001
1111 0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
1111
0000
1010 0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
1010
0101
1100 0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
1100
0011
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
0000 1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
1111
1111
0101 1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
1010
1010
0011 1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
1100
1100
0110 1001
1001
0110
0110
1001
1001
1001
1001
1111 1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
1111
0000
1010 1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
1010
0101
1100 1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
1100
0011
1 0 01
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
1001
0110
0000 0000
0000
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
0101 0101
0101
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
0011 0011
0011
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
0110 0110
0110
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1111 0000
1111
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1010 0101
1010
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1100 0011
1100
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
1001
0110
1001
0110
0000 1111
1111
1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0101 1010
1010
1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0011 1100
1100
1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0110 1001
1001
1001
1001
0110
0110
1001
1001
1111 1111
0000
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
1010 1010
0101
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
1100 1100
0011
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
1001 1001
0110
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0101
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0011
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0110
0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
1001
1001
0110
0110
1001
1001
1111
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
1010
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
1100
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
0000
0000
1111
1111
1111
1111
0101
0101
1010
1010
1010
1010
0011
0011
1100
1100
1100
1100
0110
0110
1001
1001
1001
1001
0000
1111
1111
0000
1111
0000
0101
1010
1010
0101
1010
0101
0011
1100
1100
0011
1100
0011
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
1001
0110
1111
1111
1111
1111
0000
0000
1010
1010
1010
1010
0101
0101
1100
1100
1100
1100
0011
0011
1001
1001
1001
1001
0110
0110
1111
0000
1111
0000
0000
1111
1010
0101
1010
0101
0101
1010
1100
0011
1100
0011
0011
1100
1001
0110
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1111
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1010
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1001
1111
0000
1111
0000
1111
0000
1010
0101
1010
0101
1010
0101
1100
0011
1100
0011
1100
0011
1001
0110
1001
0110
1001
0110
0000
0000
1111
1111
0000
0000
0101
0101
1010
1010
0101
0101
0011
0011
1100
1100
0011
0011
0110
0110
1001
1001
0110
0110
0000
1111
1111
0000
0000
1111
0101
1010
1010
0101
0101
1010
0011
1100
1100
0011
0011
1100
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
1111
1111
0000
0000
0000
0000
1010
1010
0101
0101
0101
0101
1100
1100
0011
0011
0011
0011
1001
1001
0110
0110
0110
0110
1111
0000
0000
1111
0000
1111
1010
0101
0101
1010
0101
1010
1100
0011
0011
1100
0011
1100
1001
0110
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
0000
0000
0000
0000
1111
1111
0101
0101
0101
0101
1010
1010
0011
0011
0011
0011
1100
1100
0110
0110
0110
0110
1001
1001
0000
1111
0000
1111
1111
0000
0101
1010
0101
1010
1010
0101
0011
1100
0011
1100
1100
0011
0110
1 0 01
0110
1 0 01
1001
0110

Bangalore, India
Page 112 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Burst Randomizer

_________________________________________________________
Power Control Groups
Each 20 msec reverse traffic channel frame is divided into 16 slots of
1.25 ms each. These slots are numbered 0 to 15 and are called power
control groups. A power control group contains 12 bits or 36 code
symbols (because of 1/3 convolutional coding) or 6 modulation symbols
(because of Walsh Coding)
Data Burst Randomizer
When there are periods of reduced speech activity, the vocoder will
reduce its data rate allowing the transmission of the signal at a lower
average level of power. On the forward traffic channel, this is done by
repeating symbols and then transmitting each symbol at reduced power.
The disadvantage of this method is that it spreads bit energy out over
time. It takes longer to collect the energy at the receiver. The
requirement for rapid power control of the reverse traffic channel
necessitated the use of alternative of reducing average power.
On the reverse traffic channel, the mobile uses full rate power when it
transmits. When redundant information is produced by the symbol
repetition scheme, the data burst randomizer will turn off the transmitter,
reducing the average transmission power. The Gating Off of the
transmitter is done pseudorandomly.
For example, at 9600 bps, the gate allows all the symbols from the
interleaver output to be transmitted; for 4800, on half the output is sent
and so on. This is done on specific power control groups. The groups
are gated off to stop transmission. The gated-on groups are pseudorandomized in their position within the frame. This data burst
randomization ensures that every code symbol input to the repetition
process is transmitted exactly once. The access channels are not
randomized.
Long Code Generator
Long codes are used for uniquely identifying each traffic channel on the
reverse link. They are also used for randomizing the data bursts as will
be explained later. The long code has a duration of 242-1 chips. If the
offsets are 64 chips apart, i.e., 26, then we get a total of 236 possible long
code offsets for the reverse link traffic channels and access channels.
This means approximately 70 billion possible offsets. Of these, a subset
is reserved for access channels and the rest are used for traffic
channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 113 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data burst Randomizer

Traffic Channel
Info bits
172/80/40/16
bits per frame i/p
8.6 kbps
4.0 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
Code Symbol
Add Frame
Quality
Indicators for
9600 & 4800
BPS rates
Convolutional
Encoder
r=1/3; k=9
Add 8 bit
Encoder
Tail
9.2 kbps
4.4 kbps
2.0 kbps
0.8 kbps
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
Code Symbol
Symbol
Repetition
Block
Interleaver
28.8 kbps
28.8 kbps
14.4 kbps
7.2 kbps
3.6 kbps
Code Symbol
28.8 kbps
Frame Data rate

Modulation symbol
Walsh Chip
Base band
Filter
+
64-ary
Orthogonal
Modulator
Data Burst
Randomiser
4.8 ksps
307.2 kcps
+
PN Chip
1. 2288
Mcps
Long Code
Generator
1. 2288 Mcps
Delay= Tc/ 2
406.9 nSec
cos ( wct )
o/p
Base band
Filter
1. 2288 Mcps
sin( wct )
Long code Mask
Power Control Groups

The traffic channel frame (20 ms) is divided into 16 slots of 1.25 ms each.
The slots are numbered 0 to 15 and are called Power Control Groups.
Each group has 12 bits or 36 code symbols or 6 mod symbols.
Data Burst Randomization
Done by gating-on or off a power control group.
Gated-on groups are pseudo randomized within the frame.
The gating ensures that the code symbol input to the repetition process is
transmitted only once.
At 9600, all symbols are sent; at 4800, one half the symbols are sent and
at 2400, one fourth symbols are sent and so on.
Data randomizer generates a masking pattern decided by the data rate
and a block of 14 bits from the long code used for spreading.
The Access Channels are not randomized.
Long Codes
Used for randomizing data bursts.
Also provide a unique offset for the channels on the reverse link.
The codes have a cycle time of 242-1 chips.
If the offsets are 64 chips apart, then 236 different offsets are possible.
This means about 70 billion offsets!!
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 114 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Reverse Channel Spreading Methods

_________________________________________________________
Long Code Mask
The PN generator is masked with same mask that was used to scramble the
forward traffic channel. The data burst randomizer generates a masking
pattern of 0s and 1s that randomly mask out the redundant data
generated by the code repetition process. The masking pattern is
determined by the data rate and by a block of 14 bits taken from the long
code. These 14 bits are the last bits of the long code used for spreading in
the last but one power control group of the previous frame. The data burst
randomization algorithm is explained in Appendix
Direct Sequence Spreading
The signal out of randomizer is then spread using long PN code. At this
point the signal already occupies a bandwidth of 307.2 Khz due to
orthogonal modulation. PN spreading increases bandwidth by 4 times to
total of 1.23 MHz. The spreading operation involves modulo-2 addition of
randomizer output and the long code. The mask varies depending on the
channel type on which the mobile is transmitting. The mask for access
channel is as shown in the diagram. For the traffic channel, the system uses
either a public long code mask or a private long code mask. The masks
for access and traffic channels are shown in the diagram.
Quadraure Spreading
After the direct sequence spreading, the signals are quadrature modulated
by spreading them into I and Q channels; for this we use 2 PN sequences
called the I and Q pilot PN sequences. Short PN codes are used for this
purpose, but no offset is applied. All mobiles use zero offset.
These sequences are periodic sequences of period 215 chips. The
sequences are generated according to the characteristic polynomials
defined by:
PI (x) = x15 + x13 + x9 + x8 + x7 + x5 +1
and
PQ(x) = x15 + x12 + x11 + x10 + x6 + x5 + x4 + x3 +1
The above polynomials have a period of 215-1 and are generated using
recursive shift register configurations with tappings at specific stages.The
pilot PN sequences repeat every 26.666... msec (= 215 / 1228800 secs) and
there are exactly 75 such repetitions every 2 seconds. The data spread by
the Q channel is delayed by 406.901 nsec (i.e., by half a chip duration ) with
reference to the I channel data. The reverse channel I and Q mapping and
the resultant constellations are shown in the diagram opposite.
Base band Filtering
The output of the quadrature spreading circuit is then passed through a
base band filter.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 115 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Direct Sequence Spreading
The spreading is done by modulo-2 addition of the randomizer output and the
long code.
For traffic channels, the system uses either a Public long code mask or a
Private Long code mask. The masks used for access and traffic channels
are shown below:
A cce ss C h a n n el L o n g C o d e M a sk
41
33 3 2
11 000 1 1 11
28 27
ACN
25 2 4
9 8
PCN
B a se _ID
A C N - A c c e ss C h an n e l N u m b e r.
P C N - P a g in g C h a n n e l N u m b er.
0
P ilo t_P N
B a se _ID - B a se statio n Id e n tificatio n

P ilo t_P N - P N o ffs et fo r th e fo rw ard C D M A ch an n el.
P u b lic L o n g C o d e M a sk
41
32 31
1 1 0 001 1 00 0
P erm u te d E lec tro n ic S erial N u m b er ( E S N )
I-Q Mapping and Constellation:

R e v e r s e C D M A c h a n n e l c o n s t e lla t io n a n d p h a s e tr a n s itio n
Q -c h a n n e l
I-Q C h a n n e l M a p p in g
Phase
450
135
-1 3 5 0
-4 5 0
10
00
I-c h a n n e l
11
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
01
Page 116 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Frame Structure
__________________________________________________________
Frame Structure of Access Channels
The access channel is generated in the same manner as the reverse traffic
channel with once exception already mentioned above: the data burst
randomizer is not used. The data random burst randomizer is used to
reduce average power when speaker activity subsides. There is no speech
activity on the access channel. Modulation rate is fixed at 4800 bps. The
reverse channel may have up to 32 Access channels (numbered 0 to 31),
per Paging channel. Each access channel is associated with a single paging
channel on the corresponding forward CDMA channel. (The forward CDMA
channel is described in the next section).
Time Alignment
An access channel frame shall begin only when the system time is an
integral multiple of 20 ms. The synchronization, timing and structure of the
access channel will be described later.
The Access channel consists of 96 bits (4800 bps, 20 ms frames). Each
frame has 88 information bits and 8 encoder Tail bits. The Access channel
has a pre amble of frames of 96 zeros to help the base station to acquire
the access channel transmission.
Frame Structure of Reverse Traffic Channel
The characteristics of reverse traffic channels are given below:
o Variable data rates 9600 to 1200 bps
o Frame duration is 20 ms.
o For 9600 bps, each frame has 192 bits with 172 info bits, 12 bits
of Frame Quality Indicator (CRC) and 8 tail bits.
o The generator polynomial is x12+x11+x10+x9+x8+x4+x+1
o At 4800 bps, we have 96 bits per frame with 80 info bits and 8 bits
for Frame Quality Indicator and Tail bits.
o The generator polynomial is x8+x7+x4+x3+x+1
o At 2400 and 1200 bps speeds we have 8 Tail bits with 40 and 16
info bits respectively.
o The Tail bits are all 0s.
o A handset may support staggered Traffic channel frames. The
time offset is specified by the FRAME_OFFSET parameter in
the data base. A zero offset traffic channel can begin only when
the system time is an integral multiple of 20 ms. A staggered
frame begins 1.25 x FRAME_OFFSET ms later than the zero
offset traffic channel frame. The reverse channel interleaver will
be aligned with the traffic channel frame.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 117 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Frame Structures
A c c e s s C h a n n e l F ra m e S tru c tu re
9 6 b it s ( 2 0 m s e c )
88
8
T
9 6 0 0 b p s F ra m e S tru c tu re
1 9 2 b its (2 0 m s e c )
172
4 8 0 0 b p s F r a m e S tru c tu re
4 8 b it s ( 2 0 m s e c )
40
9 6 b it s ( 2 0 m s e c )
80
12
8
T
2 4 b it s ( 2 0 m s e c )
16
8
T
Access channel has Preamble frames of 96 bits. This helps the base station to
detect and lock onto an access channel.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 118 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse channel Traffic frames

_________________________________________________________
Reverse Channel
Though the general frame structure for the access and traffic channels has
been discussed in the previous page, the traffic frame structure depends on
whether it carries primary traffic or secondary traffic. These two terms are
discussed below:
Primary Traffic
The main traffic between the mobile and the base station is called the
Primary Traffic.
Secondary Traffic
Some times an additional traffic stream could also be transmitted along with
the primary traffic data. This additional traffic is called the Secondary traffic
data. The signalling associated with the primary and secondary traffic is
called Primary and Secondary signalling traffic respectively.
Dim- and -Burst
A frame in which the secondary traffic is combined with the primary traffic is
called a Dim and Burst frame. The frame structures given in the previous
page are modified to show the primary and secondary traffic/signalling, as
shown in the diagram opposite. Frame structures for 9600 bps speed only
are shown. For other speeds, there are NO SEPARATE SIGNALLING
TRAFFIC OR SECONDARY TRAFFIC DATA BITS; the frames for these
lower speeds carry only primary/ regular traffic information.
Notations of Frame Structures
MM bit: Mixed Mode Bit: 0-Primary Traffic only
1-Primary trafficand / or signalling traffic or
secondary traffic.
TT bit: Traffic Type bit: 0- Signalling bit; 1- Secondary traffic
TM bits: Traffic Mode bits: 00 -- 80 primary traffic data bits and either 88
signaling traffic bits or 88 secondary traffic data.
01 -- 40 bits of primary data and either 128 bits
of
secondary traffic or signalling data.
10-- 16 bits of primary data and 152 bits of
signalling or secondary traffic data.
11 --168 bits of either signalling or secondary
traffic.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 119 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Channel
o The type of reverse channel frame sent depends on type of traffic/
signalling information it carries.
Primary and signalling Traffic Frames

172 bits
9600 bps primary traffic only
171 bits primary traffic
MM
=0
Dim and Burst with Ratte 1/2 Primary
and Signalling Traffic
80 bits primary tfc
88 bits signalling tfc
MM TT TM
= 1 =0 =00

2 40 bits pri. tfc
MM TT TM
= 1 =0 =01

16 pri
MM TT TM
= 1 =0 =10
Blank and Burst with signalling
Traffic Only
MM TT TM
= 1 =0 =11
Alternatively, if the secondary traffic option is used then we will have

secondary traffic data bits in place of signalling bits shown above.
For other lower speeds, there is no separate signalling/secondary traffic.
Frames for these rates carry only the regular/ primary traffic information.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 120 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Demodulation of Reverse channel

_________________________________________________________
Demodulation of Reverse CDMA channel
IS-95A standard does not specify details on modulation. So, only brief
overives of the structure and processes performed in the demodulators are
presented here.
The signal is down converted from 800 MHz or 1.9 GHz bands
down to baseband. The down conversion normally takes
several steps
Analog to Digital conversion is performed on down converted
data
Base station also implements Rake Receiver.
The correlators perform a product integration in order to
despread the short PN codes. Walsh code modulation
symbols are detected
Combiner combines outputs of fingers non-coherently
Signal is then de-interleaved
Viterbi decoder does not know the rate of the vocoded frame
and must decode at all four rates and then use metrics to
decide which rate was most likely rate transmitted
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 121 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Demodulation of Reverse CDMA Channel
Finger 1
C
O
M
B
I
N
E
R
Finger 2
Finger 3
Finger 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
DeInterleaver
Power
Control
Decision

Bangalore, India
Finger 1
U/D
Command
Page 122 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 6
THE FORWARD CHANNEL
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 123 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 6
The Forward Channel
123
Objectives
125
Forward Channel
126
Forward Channel frame structure
128
Walsh Codes
130
Pilot Channel
132
The Sync Channel
134
Block Interleaving
136
The structure of Sync channel
138
Paging Channel
140
Paging Channel Structure
142
Paging channel messages
144
Forward traffic channel
148
Forward Power control sub channel
150
Power control
152
Open loop power control
154
Near-Far problem in the reverse link
156
Near-far problem Forward link
158
Closed loop power control
160
Forward channel-Power control sub channel
162
System timing aspects
166
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 124 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
After completion of this section, the trainee is expected to be able to:
List and explain the functions and features of the various Logical
Channels in the Forward and Reverse Channels.
Explain the structure of different logical Channels.
Explain the application of Walsh Codes in Forward and Reverse
channels.
Explain the frame structure for the various logical channels.
Explain the Power Control Mechanism in CDMA:
Define the need for Power Control
Specify types of Power Control.
Explain hoe open loop power control is carried out.
Explain the Near-Far problem in the Reverse and Forward
Links.
Explain the concept of Power Control Groups.
Explain with the help of a simple schematic of the frame
structure, how power control is effected.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 125 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Forward Channel

_________________________________________________________
The Forward Channel
The forward channel is from the base station to the mobile or subscriber
hand set and comprises the following:
The Pilot Channel
The sync Channel
The Paging Channel
The Forward Traffic Channel
o Fundamental Code Channel
o Supplemental Code Channel (max 7)
The transmit frequency is 45 MHz away from the reverse link frequency
and has 1.23 MHz bandwidth. The channels all use Walsh Codes and 64ary orthogonal codes for modulation. The general structure is shown in the
opposite page. The pilot channel is the first Walsh code number W0. There
are up to 7 Walsh codes for the Paging Channel and the Sync channel
takes the Walsh Code number W32.
The Forward Traffic channels carry information pertaining to the Mobile
Power Control also.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 126 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
General Structure of the forward channel
Forward CDMA Channel
W0
Pilot
W1
W2
W7
upto 7 paging
channels. Unused
paging channels
carry traffic.
W32
W8
W30
Sync
channel
W33
Traffic Channels
Traffic data
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
W31
Mob.Pwr
control
sub.chl

Bangalore, India
Page 127 / 425
W63
Issue II Rev 4
The Forward Channel Frame Structure

_________________________________________________________
Forward Traffic Channel Frame Structure
The forward traffic channels are grouped into rate sets. Rate Set 1 has four
elements: 9600, 4800, 2400 and 1200 bps. Rate Set 2 uses four elements:
14,400, 7200, 3600 and 1800 bps. The quality of Rate Set 2 vocoder is
superior to that of Rate Set1. The vocoder produces a frame every 20 ms
using CELP (Code Excited Linear Prediction) technique.
Forward Traffic Channel Frame Structure for RS1
When the data rate on the forward traffic channel is 9600 bps, each frame
of 192 bits carries 172 information bits, 12 frame quality bits and 8 encoder
tail bits (set of all 0s). 172 information bits consist of 1 or 4 format bits. A
variety of multiplexing options are supported. The entire 171 information bits
can be used for primary traffic or 168 bits can be used for 80 primary traffic
bits and 88 signalling traffic bits or 88 secondary traffic bits. Other options
use 40 and 128 or 16 and 152 bits primary and signalling/secondary traffic.
Alternatively, the entire 168 bits can be used for signalling or secondary
traffic. Signalling messages can be Authentication challenge message,
handoff direction message, alert with information message, neighbor list
update message etc.
At 4800 bps, each frame of 96 bits carries 80 information bits, 8 frame
quality bits, and 8 tail bits. At 2400 bps, each frame of 48 bits carries 40
information bits, 8 tail bits. Finally, at 1200 bps, each frame of 24 bits carries
16 information bits and 8 tail bits. The base station can select the data
transmission rate on a frame-by-frame basis. A data rate of 9600 bps can
support multiplexed traffic and signalling. Data rates of 1200, 2400 and
4800 bps can support only primary traffic information. The frame quality
indicator is a CRC on the information bits in the frame.
When the data rate on the forward traffic channel is 14,400 bps, each frame
of 288 bits carries 267 information bits, 12 frame quality bits and 8 encoder
tail bits. For other data rates, please refer to the diagram given in the
opposite page.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 128 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

192 Bits (20 ms)
9600 bps
172
12
96 Bits (20 ms)

4800 bps
80
48 Bits (20 ms)

40
2400 bps
8
T
24 Bits (20 ms)

16
1200 bps
8
T

288 Bits (20 ms)
14400 bps
267
R/F
12
10
144 Bits (20 ms)

7200 bps
125
R/F
72 Bits (20 ms)
3600 bps
55
R/F
36 Bits (20 ms)

1800 bps
21
R/F
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 129 / 425
F= Frame
quality
indicator
(CRC)
T=Encoder
bits
R/F=Reserved
/Flag bit
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Codes
_________________________________________________________
Walsh Codes
All logical channels on the forward link are Direct Sequence Spread by
using an appropriate Walsh Code. For instance, the pilot channel would
be spread by using Walsh Code W0, pumped at the rate of 1.2288 Mcps.
The paging channel would be spread by W1 and a traffic channel, say,
38 would be spread by Walsh Code W38 and so on.
The Walsh Codes are explained in the previous chapter.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 130 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Code Generation
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 131 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Channel
_________________________________________________________
The Pilot Channel
The Pilot channel is transmitted always on the forward link, on each
active Forward CDMA Channel. It is an unmodulated spread spectrum
signal consisting of all 0s. It helps the mobile/ hand set receiver to
effectively perform coherent detection and provides the handset the
required carrier phase and system timing references. The Pilot channel
is directly modulated by the Walsh Code Number W0 at a PN chip rate of
1.2288 Mcps.
Pilot PN sequence Offset
Every base station uses a specific timing offset for the PN sequence to
enable the receiver to identify a forward CDMA channel. The time offsets
may be reused within a CDMA cellular network. There are 512 possible
time offsets and are numbered 0-512. The offset index (0-512) specifies
the offset value with reference to the zero offset Pilot PN sequence
The offset for a given PN sequence, in terms of chips, is equal to the
offset number multiplied by 64. for example, if the offset index is 20, then
the PN sequence is offset by 20x64=1280 PN chips. For the zero offset
value, the PN sequence starts at the beginning of EVERY EVEN
SECOND in time, with reference to the base station transmission time.
When the Pilot PN sequence is offset, say by 20, then the PN sequence
will start 1.04166 ms AFTER the start of EVERY EVEN SECOND.
(duration of a chip = 813.8 ns ; 813.8 x 10-9 x 1280 = 1.04166 ms)
The pilot PN sequence offset is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
The same offset is used on all CDMA frequency allocations for a given
base station.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 132 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Channel Offset
Each Base station uses a time offset of the Pilot PN sequence to identify a
forward CDMA channel.
512 offset values ( 0 - 511 )
The zero offset sequence starts at every even second.
The offset, in chips, is = Offset index * 64; for example, an offset index of 20
means that the PN sequence starts 1280 chips, i.e., 1280 x 813.8 nsec =
1.04166.. msec AFTER the beginning of EVERY even second.
The same pilot PN sequence offset is used on all CDMA frequency assignments
for a given base station.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 133 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Sync Channel

_________________________________________________________
The Sync Channel
The Sync Channel operates at a fixed bit rate of 1200 bps. The block
schematic for the sync channel is shown in the opposite page. It is used
for the mobile to get the Timing and Long code references from the base
station.
The sync data is passed through a convolutional coder of 1/2 rate and
constraint length K=9. The output of the convolutional coder is 2400 bps
and is passed through code repetition circuit to get 4800 bps.
The output of the repetition circuit is then block interleaved and
subjected to direct sequence spreading using Walsh Code number 32
and then to a quadrature spreading circuit which is similar to the one
used in the reverse channel.
The sync channel is NOT scrambled and does NOT carry the Power
control sub channel.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 134 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Sync channel
Operates at 1200 bps.

Used for the mobile to get Timing and Long code references.
It is NOT scrambled.
It does NOT carry the power control bits.
Uses the same pilot PN offset as the Pilot chl.
The Sync Channel Block Schematic
Code
symbol
1200 bps
Convolution
Coder
r=1/2;K=9
Walsh
Code 32
Mod
symbol
Symbol
repetition
2400
bps
PN chips
1.2288 Mbps
Block
Interleaver
+
Mod
symbol
4800
bps
4800
bps
I channel pilot
PN sequence
1.2288 mbps
I (t)
BPF
I chl
Cos Wct
Q chl
BPF
Q channel pilot
PN sequence
1.2288 mbps
s(t)
Q (t)
X
Sin Wct
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 135 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Block Interleaving
_________________________________________________________
The Sync Channel - Block Interleaving
The sync channel uses a block interleaver spanning 26.666.. msec., which
is equal to 128 modulation symbols at a symbol rate of 4800 sps. The
interleaving technique employed for the sync channel is called the bit
reversal method.
As in the case of the reverse channel, here also the bits are written in to an
array and read out in a particular order. The write and read sequences are
given in Tables 1 and 2.
Let us illustrate the bit reversal method.
Assume a 4x4 matrix as shown below:
1
13
10
14
11
15
12
16
The data is written by columns.
The read sequence is by the Rows, as shown:

1
11
10
12
13
15
14
16
For bigger matrices, the choice of rows could be different, as shown in

Table 2 given in the page opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 136 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Sync Channel

Table 1. Sync Channel Interleaver- writing sequence
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
Table 2. Sync Channel Interleaver array Read Sequence

1
33
17
49
9
41
25
57
5
37
21
53
13
45
29
61
3
35
19
51
11
43
27
59
7
39
23
55
15
47
31
63
2
34
18
50
10
42
26
58
6
38
22
54
14
46
30
62
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
4
36
20
52
12
44
28
60
8
40
24
56
16
48
32
64
1
33
17
49
9
41
25
57
5
37
21
53
13
45
29
61
3
35
19
51
11
43
27
59
7
39
23
55
15
47
31
63

Bangalore, India
2
34
18
50
10
42
26
58
6
38
22
54
14
46
30
62
4
36
20
52
12
44
28
60
8
40
24
56
16
48
32
64
Page 137 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Structure of Sync Channel

_________________________________________________________
The Structure of the Sync Channel
We have seen earlier the characteristics and the block schematic of the
sync channel; let us now have a closer look at its actual structure. See
diagram in the opposite page. The sync channel is sent in 80 ms Super
Frames. Each super frame contains three 26.666... ms sync frames. The
first bit of each frame is the SOM (Start of Message) bit. A number of
super frames are combined to get a SYNC CHANNEL MESSAGE
CAPSULE.
The message capsule consists of
Sync channel message
Padding.
The sync Channel message consists of a length field (8
bits).
The value of Message length is in octets and has a maximum value of
148 octets. This if the message length is 100, then it means 100 octets
or 800 bits.
Message body
CRC field.
The padding consists of zero or more bits. The padding bits are added to
the end of the sync channel message so that total number of bits sent
equal integer multiples of 93 bits. The padding bits are set to 0.
The sync channel message body format is given in the Table below
Field
MSG_TYPE
P_REV
MIN_P_REV
No. of bits
8
8
8
SID
NID
15
16
PILOT_PN
LC_STATE
42
SYS_TIME
PRAT
36
2
Reserved
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Remarks
Message Type. Set to 00000001
Protocol Revision Level ( 00000010 )
Min. P_REV. Only mobiles with P_REV numbers
greater than the minimum can access the system.
System Identity.
N/W Identity. The SID and NID are a pair to identify a
CDMA network.
The base station sets this field to the offset number
given for this cell; it is in units of 64 PN chips.
Long code State. The long code state at the time given
by the SYS_TIME field in the message body.
System time. ( Explained later in another section )
Sets the paging channel data rate; 00 means 9600 bps;
01 means 4800 bps. Other combinations are reserved.
Set to 000.

Bangalore, India
Page 138 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Sync Channel structure
Sync Channel is sent in Super frames of 80 msec.

Each super frame has 3 frames of 26.666... msec each.
A number of super frames form a sync channel message capsule.
A capsule has a message length indicator, message body and
CRC.Message length is in octects.
It also has padding bits set to 0; the number of padding bits is to make
the total number of bits equal to an integer multiple of 93 bits.
The beginning of a super frame has an SOM bit set to 1 for the first
frame and set to 0 for other frames.
Sync Channel Structure

80 msec; 96 bits
Sync Channel superframe
Sync.chl
Frame
Sync.chl
Frame
Sync Channel superframe
Sync.chl
Frame
Sync.chl
Frame
Sync.chl
Frame
Sync.chl
Frame
S
O
M
S
O
M
S
O
M
S
O
M
S
O
M
S
O
M
Sync channel Message Capsule; = 93 x Ns ; Ns is number of superframes needed.

Sync Channel Message
MSG_LENGTH
8 bits
Message Body
2 - 1146 bits
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Padding ; as needed ; 0s.

CRC
30 bits

Bangalore, India
Page 139 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging Channel
_________________________________________________________
The Paging Channel
The paging channel is a 9600 or 4800 bps, encoded, block interleaved
signal used by the base station to transmit system overhead information and
mobile specific messages. The paging channel is transmitted in 20 ms
frames. The Paging channels use the same pilot PN sequence offsets as
the pilot channel.
The interleaver output and the paging channel frame align with the
beginning of the zero offset pilot PN sequence at every even second. i.e. at
0,2,4 ... seconds in time.
The block schematic of the paging channel arrangement is shown in the
diagram opposite.
The long code mask used for the paging channel has 42 bits and has a
format shown in the opposite page. The Decimator outputs one out of every
64 bits of the long code so that the output rate is reduced to 19.2 kbps.
The paging channel DOES NOT carry power control subchannels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 140 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Paging Channel
Operates at 9600 0r 4800 bps speed.

Used by base station to convey system overhead info and mobile specific
messages to the mobile.
Does not carry power control sub channels.
Use the same PN sequence offset as the pilot channel.
Up to 7 Paging channels are possible, the first one taking Walsh code number
W 1.
Paging Channel Arrangement:
Code
symbol
9600 bps
4800 bps
Convolution
Coder
r=1/2;K=9
Walsh
Code , W1- w7
Mod
symbol
Symbol
repetition
19200 or
9600bps
PN chips
1.2288 Mbps
Block
Interleaver
+
Mod
symbol
19.2
ksps
19.2
ksps
19.2 ksps
Long Code Mask

for paging chl. P
Long code
generator
Decimator
64:1
Quadrature
spreading
circuitry
s(t)
Paging Channel Long Code Mask

41
29 28
24 23
1100011001101 00000
21 20
PCN
9 8
000000000000
PILOT_PN
PCN - Paging Channel number

PILOT_PN - Pilot PN sequence offset index for the forward CDMA Channel.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 141 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging Channel Structure

_________________________________________________________
The Paging channel Structure
The paging channel is used for sending control information to mobiles which
are not assigned to a traffic channel; i.e., to mobiles which are not engaged
in a call. We have earlier seen the characteristics of the paging channel and
a block schematic of how it is implemented. Let us now look at the actual
structure of the Paging Channel, as we did for the Sync Channel. The
paging channel structure is shown in the opposite page.
The paging Channel is sent in 80 ms SLOTS.
A maximum of 2048 slots (numbered 0 to 2047) are possible. The
grouping of 2048 paging slots is called the Maximum Slot cycle .
The cycle duration is 163.84 seconds.
A mobile, operating in the slotted mode monitors the paging
channel using a slot cycle which is a sub multiple of the maximum
slot cycle length.
Each 80 ms slot is divided into 4 sub frames of 20 ms.
Each 20 ms sub frame is divided into two 10 ms halves. The first
bit in any such half frame is the SYNCHRONIZED CAPSULE
INDICATOR (SCI) bit.
Just like the sync channel, a paging channel message capsule
consists of a message body, padding bits and CRC.
The base station may send either a synchronized paging
message capsule or an unsynchronized one. The former begins
immediately after the SCI bit whereas the latter starts immediately
AFTER the previous message capsule.
If there are 8 or more bits available BEFORE the next SCI is due,
the base station may send an unsynchronized message capsule
immediately following the paging message. No padding bits are
added in such cases.
If there are less than 8 bits before the next SCI, or, if NO
unsynchronized message is sent, the base station adds padding
bits up to the position of the SCI bit.
The base station sets the SCI bit to 1 for synchronous messages
and it is set to 0 in all other cases.
The FIRST paging message to be sent on any paging channel is
a synchronized message capsule. This permits mobiles operating
in the slotted mode to achieve synchronization immediately after
becoming active.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 142 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Paging channel Structure
Divided into 80 ms slots. Maximum 2048 slots.

Each 80 msec slot is divided into four 20 ms sub frames.
Every 20 ms slot is divided into two 10 ms half frames. The first bit of each half
frame is called the Synchronization Capsule Indicator (SCI)
Synchronized messages are immediately preceded by the SCI. The
unsynchronized messages follow the current message.
If there are less than 8 bits before the next SCI is due, padding bits are added.
If there are more than 8 bits then the base station sends an unsynchronized
message without any padding bits.
The first paging message in any paging channel is a synchronized message
capsule.
163.84 sec; 163.84 x R bits ; R = 9600 or 4800 bps.
Maximum Paging Channel Slot cycle ( 2048 slots )
80 msec ; .08 x R bits
slot 0
slot 1
slot 2
.......................
slot 2047
4 frames of 20 msec; Two 10 msec half frames per frame.

10 msec; .01 x R bits
Paging Chl
Half Frame
Paging Chl
Half Frame
S
C
I
S
Half frame C
body
I
paging chl capsule
Half frame
body
Paging Chl
Half Frame
....... ..... .
S
S
Half
frame
C
C
I body
I
. . . . . . . . .. . .
0
paging chl capsule
MSG_LENGTH
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Half frame
body
paging chl capsule
First Paging Asynchronous

capsule
Capsules
Synchronous
Paging Chl
Half Frame
paging chl capsule
Asynchronous Synchronous
Capsules
Capsule
MESSAGE BODY

Bangalore, India
CRC
PADDING
BITS
Page 143 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Paging Channel Messages

______________________________________________________
Paging Channel Messages
The Table in the opposite page shows the different types of Paging Channel
messages. The messages are grouped as shown in the table and are sent
either periodically or on an as- required basis.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 144 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging channel Messages
Systems Parameters
Message type
binary )
00000001
Access Parameters
00000010
Neighbour List
CDMA channel list
Slotted Page
Page Message
Order Message
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
Channel Assignment
Data Burst Message
Authentication Challenge
SSD update
Feature Notification
Extended
system
Parameters
reserved
reserved
service Redirection
General Page
Global service redirection
Null message
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
A number of fixed length messages are sent i

this group. see Table 2.
defines the parameters to be used by a
mobile while on an Access channel; it is a
variable length message.
This is a variable length message.
- do - do - do Orders are sent to the mobile by the base
station for base stn ack., pilot measurement
request, registration accepted, message
encryption mode etc. This is a variable
length message.
A variable length message
- do This is a FIXED length message
- do This is a variable length message
- do -
00001110
00001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
-------------
This is a variable length message

- do - do Fixed length message format
Message Name
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Remarks

Bangalore, India
Page 145 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging Channel Messages Types

_________________________________________________________
Paging channel Message types - System Parameter Messages
The system parameter messages are a group of fixed length messages sent
on the Paging channel by the base station. There are, in all, 41 different
types of system parameter messages. Table given in the opposite page
shows some of the important message types.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 146 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
System Parameter Messages

Field
MES_TYPE
PILOT_PN
BASE_ID
PAGE_CHAN
POWER_UP_REG
Len ( bits )
8
9
16
3
1
POWER_DOWN_REG
REG_PER
PWR_REP_THRESH
PWR_REP_FRAMES
5
4
PWR_PERIOD_ENABLE
PWR_REP_DELAY
T_ADD
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Remarks
SET TO 00000001.
pilot PN offset for the base station, in units of 64 PN chips.
Base station identification number
sets the number of paging channels
To enable mobiles to register immediately after powering on
and receiving the system over head messages. 1 enables
the facility and a 0 disables it.
To enable a mobile to register immediately before powering
off.
Registration period. For non roamer based registration, the
value is set to 0000000. The base station sets the field to
any value within 29-85, In case the mobile does timer based
registration. The timer value is given by:
T ( integer) = 2REG_PER/ 4 x .08 sec.
The power control reporting threshold.
Power control reporting frame count. The base station sets
this number which decides the number of frames over which
the mobile should count frame errors. The number is given
by the integer value of
2(PWR_REP_FRAMES/ 2) x 5 frames.
Set to 1 if the mobile is to send periodic measurement
reports.
Sets the period for which the mobile waits following a
Measurement report message before restarting frame
counting for power control purposes. The value should be in
multiples of 4 frames.
Pilot detection threshold. Triggers transmission of Pilot
strength measurement message, initiating a hand off
process.

Bangalore, India
Page 147 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_______________________________________________________
The forward traffic channel operates at variable speeds upto 9600 bps.
With one pilot channel, one sync channel and seven paging channels,
we could have a maximum of 55 traffic channels. The block schematic of
the traffic channel is shown in the opposite page. The arrangement is
more or less similar to the reverse channel. The signals are passed
through a convolutional encoder of r=1/2 and constraint length K=9. For
every input bit, we get two bits at the output. The symbol repeater after
the convolutional coder repeats the symbols twice for 4800 bps speed, 4
times for 2400 bps and 8 times at 1200 bps.
The block interleaver has specific write and read sequences/patterns for
different speeds of operation. The details of read - write arrays are not
included in the manual. The output of the interleaver is scrambled using
a 64:1 decimator. The scrambling is done by modulo-2 addition of the
interleaver output with the binary value of the long code chip which is
valid at the beginning of transmission period for that particular symbol.
The resulting PN sequence is the same as the long code at 1.2288 MHz
clock rate where only the first output of every 64 bits is used for
scrambling the data.
The scrambled data (19.2 kbps) is then passed through a Multiplexer
where the power control bits are added. For scrambling the power
control bits, the output of the 64:1 decimator is passed through another
decimator to produce a bit rate of 800 bps.
The multiplexer output is then subjected to orthogonal modulation by
Walsh codes and then are quadrature spread. The Walsh code table is
the same as in the case of the reverse channel. The major difference is
that in the forward channel, the 64 bit Walsh code is sent for every code
symbol where as in the reverse channel the Walsh code is sent for every
6 symbols.
Note
The forward link uses the Walsh Codes to provide orthogonality between
logical channels within a cell or sector.
The reverse channel uses the same set of Walsh Codes for isolating six
bit blocks of data transmitted by the mobile.
The multiplex options for primary and secondary traffic/ signalling are the
same as for the reverse channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 148 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

19.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
9.2 kbps
Forward Tfc chl
9.6 kbps
4.8 kbps
4.4 kbps
info bits
4.8 kbps
2.4 kbps
2.0 kbps
(172/80/40/16
2.4 kbps
1.2 kbps
0.8 kbps
bits / frame
Convolution
Add Frame
symbol
Add 8 bit
coder
Quality
repetition
8.6 kbps
encoder tail
r=1/2; K=9
Indicators
4.0 kbps
2.0 kbps
19.2 kbps
0.8 kbps
pwr cont
19.2 kbps 800 bits
M
Block
+
+ 19.2 kbps UX
Interleaver
19.2 kbps
Long Code
Long Code
Mask
Generator
64:1
Decimator
19.2 kbps
800
bps
24:1
Decimator
A*
Walsh
code n
1.2288
Mcps
* A is the quadrature spreading circuitry.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 149 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Channel-Power Control Sub Channel

_______________________________________________________
Forward Traffic Channel- Power Control sub channel
Before discussing the functions of the Power Control Sub channel in the
forward link, let us understand the mechanism of Power Control in CDMA.
There are basically 2 methods of power control in CDMA:
Open Loop Power Control
This is purely a mobile unit function. It gives open estimation. This is done
only during the initial stage as soon as the mobile is turned ON.
Closed Loop Power Control
This involves both the base station and the mobile unit and gives a closed
loop power correction.
The power correction is done on the forward channel.
Output Power Limits
Before we understand the concepts of power control in CDMA, we need to
look at the output power limits for the mobile. In earlier sections we come to
know that the mean output power of the mobile should be less than - 50
dBm / 1.23 MHz, for all frequencies within 615 kHz of the centre
frequency.
Further, the mobile transmits nominal power only during gated- ON periods
of 1.25 ms; the 1.25 ms durations are called power control groups. The
output is defined in a power mask shown opposite:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 150 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Output Power Limits
Mean output power

of the ensemble
average.
( reference line
6 micro
seconds
20 dB or
to the
Noise Floor
3 dB
1.25 mSec
Transmission Envelope Mask - Average Gated-on Power Control Group
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 151 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Power Control
_________________________________________________________
Power Control
Implementing power control for the reverse link helps eliminate or
minimize what is called a Near - Far interference problem. This is
explained in detail later in the section.
The idea is to control the output of all the mobiles in a cell such that the
total power received at a cell site from all the mobiles is equal to the
nominal receive power level times the number of such mobiles.
i.e., [ Prec ]FROM ALL MOBILES = [ PREC ]PER MOBILE X number of mobiles
Effect of Power control
The signal received by a mobile is subject to both log normal and
Raleigh fading as shown in Fig.(a). The average path loss is obtained
from this. If the receive signal power could be REVERSED as shown in
fig. (b), then it would nullify the power variations at the cell site, i.e., the
base station.
At the cell site, the receive signal quality is examined with reference to
the available Frame Error Rate and the EXPECTED value of FER. Then
a decision on whether a mobile needs to increase or decrease its output
power is taken. This mechanism is called the CDMA closed Loop Power
Control. The mobile power RECEIVED at the cell site after closed loop
control looks like as shown in Fig.(c).
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 152 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Power Control Mechanism

Fig. ( a ). Mobile Rec. signal in log normal & Rayleigh Fading
MS rec.sig.strength
Rayleigh Fading
Avg. Path Loss
Distance
MS Tx Pwr
w/o closed loop
Tx Pwr w/o smooth filter
desired avg Tx power
Fig. ( b ). Mobile Transmit Power Without closed loopcontrol
Mobile rec.power
at Cell site
Receive Power at Cell site

with closed loop control
Distance
Fig. ( c ). Mobile Power at cell site, with closed loop control.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 153 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Open Loop Power Control

_________________________________________________________
Estimated Open Loop Power
When the mobile is turned ON, it is in what is called the ACCESS STATE
and looks at the Pilot, Synchronization and the Paging Channels coming
from the base station. The Paging channel contains a number of Access
Parameters which the mobile should be using.
In the Access State, the mobile is not assigned any traffic channel and
therefore the closed loop corrections will not be active.
The mobile starts by sending a weak signal, if Pilot signal from the base
station is strong. (This means that the mobile is quite close to the base
station and in CDMA the basic aim is to transmit just the minimum power
required for a specified quality or performance objective; transmission of
more power would make the mobile a jammer for all other mobiles. If the
pilot signal from the base station is weak, then the mobile transmits a higher
power. To put it differently, the mobile transmit power is inversely
proportional to the Pilot level it receives from the base station.
The mobile transmits its FIRST access signal (called the Access Probe ) at
a nominal power level defined by the following equation:
Mean output Pwr (dBm.) = - Rec. Pwr (dBms) - 73 + NOM_PWR +
INIT_PWR + the sum of access probe corrections.
where,
INIT_PWR is the adjustment to the first probe to make it less than the
desired signal power. Its range is -16 to 15 dB, and its nominal value is 0
dB.
NOM_PWR is the correction that is required to provide the correct receive
power at the base station. The range is - 8 to 7 dB and nominal value is 0
dB.
For the FIRST access probe, the corrections are zero. When the base
station does not respond to the first probe from the mobile, the latter sends
another probe by incrementing its transmit power by a PWR_STEP. This
has a range of 0 to 7 dB. The incrementing or decrementing the power is
called the Access Probe correction.
For example, without any corrections or adjustments,
Mean Output Power = - Rec.Pwr - 73 = - ( -90 dBm ) - 73 = + 17 dBm.
The values of NOM_PWR, PWR_INIT and PWR_STEP are all assumed to
be 0 dB.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 154 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Estimated Open Loop Power Control
When the mobile is turned ON, it locks on to the pilot, paging and sync
channels.
There is no traffic channel assigned to the mobile and hence there is no
closed loop power control.
The mobile Tx power during this initial Access state is inversely proportional
to the Pilot signal strength received from the base station.
The FIRST access probe is sent at a nominal power given by:
(PT)mob = - ( Prx ) - 73 +NOM_PWR + INIT_PWR
Where
INIT_PWR is the adjustment to the first probe to make it less than
the desired signal power. Its range is -16 to 15 dB, and its nominal
value is 0 dB.
NOM_PWR is the correction that is required to provide the correct
receive power at the base station. The range is -8 to 7 dB and
nominal value is 0 dB.
If the base station doesnt respond for the first probe, the mobile
increments its output by a PWR_STEP, within a range of 0-7 dB.
For example, if the nominal receive level is -90 dBm, ten the mobile TX
power for the first probe without any corrections is +17 dBm.
After a traffic channel is assigned to a mobile, the power control shifts to the
Closed loop mode.
Tx Power
One PWR_STEP
First Access power.

= - PR - 73 + NOM_PWR
+ INIT_PWR
time
Base station ACK Time out
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
Random Time out before the

next probe

Bangalore, India
Page 155 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Near-Far Problem in the Reverse Link

_________________________________________________________
Power Control
Earlier we mentioned that the idea behind power control is to control the
output of all the mobiles in a cell such that the total power received at a cell
site from all the mobiles is equal to the nominal receive power level times
the number of such mobiles.
i.e., [ Prec ]FROM
MOBILES.
ALL MOBILES
[ PREC ]PER
MOBILE
NUMBER OF
This means that on the reverse link we ensure that all mobiles cause the
same receive level at the base site. On the forward link, the purpose of
power control is to limit the Tx. power of the base station in respect of
individual mobiles such that the mobiles receive more or less at the same
level; this would ensure that there is minimum interference on the mobile
receive paths.
So, the fundamental idea is to keep the receive levels at a specified
constant value, irrespective of the distance of the mobile from the base
station. This is required to solve what is called the Near-Far problem.
Near - Far Problem in the Reverse Link
This is illustrated in the Diagram opposite.
If the mobiles M1 and M2 transmit at the same output power levels, then, if
both the mobiles are at the same distance d from the base station, then we
may assume the receive levels for these mobiles at the base station would
be the same.
i.e., ( PR1 )due to mob.1 = ( PR2 )due to mob.2
If mobile 1 is the desired mobile, then the signal coming from mobile 2 is the
interference signal. Since both are of equal power, the C/I in this case will
be 1. [Fig. (a)]
Now, if mobile 2 moves to a point d/2 from the base station, then the receive
level at the base station would increase by 16 times. This is because, in the
mobile environment, the receive power varies inversely proportional to the
4th power of distance.
This means that the C/I becomes 1/16 i.e., the C / I has become poorer.
However, if we assume 16 mobiles at the same distance d (as for mobile 1),
then the receive signal at the base station would be 16 times the receive
level caused by one mobile. If the over all C /I is acceptable, then the
capacity of the system increases by 16 times (theoretically).
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 156 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Near - Far Problem (Reverse Channel)
M1
PT
PR2
M2
PT
PR1
d
PR1
= PR2
C / I = 1.
Fig. ( a ). Receive signals at the base station; 2 mobiles at the same distance.
M1
PT
PR2
PT
M2
PR1
time
d/2
d
PR2
= 16 PR1
C / I = 1 / 16.
Fig. ( b ). Receive signals at the base station; 2 mobiles at different distances
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 157 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Near-Far Problem - Forward Link

_________________________________________________________
Near - Far Problem in the Forward Link
Remember that the base station transmits signals to a number of
mobiles simultaneously, using the CDMA technique. This means that the
total power transmitted by the base station is the sum of trans. power for
all the forward channels in use at the given instant of time. Imagine that
the base station transmits to 2 mobiles at the same distance from it. The
trans. power resources used by the base station for either of the mobiles
is the same, say PT. The signals arriving at the mobiles would be equal
in strength and the C/I would be =1.
Suppose mobile M2 moves closer to the base station, to a point d/2 from
it. Assuming that the base station still transmits at the same power, the
signal strength at M2 would be 16 times stronger than that at M1. (1/d4
model).
This means that the closer mobile will have a better C/I (16 in this case)
and those far away from the base station will have poorer C/I values.
More over the high receive levels act as jammers to other mobiles
Therefore the power control strategy is to allocate lower power
resources to mobiles which are close by and higher resources to mobiles
that are farther away.
The mobile measures the FER of the received signal and sends a Power
Measurement Report Message to the BTS if the FER crosses a specified
limit. The BTS does the Forward Link Power Control adjusting the power
gains of the forward link Traffic channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 158 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Near - Far Problem (Forward Link)

M1
PT
(PR)2
M2
(PR)1
d
PR1 = PR2
C / I = 1.
Fig. (a ). Base Station sending constant Power to mobiles at the same distance
M1
PT
(P R ) 2
M2
(P R ) 1
d / 2
tim e
d
P R2 =16 P R1
F ig . (b ). B a s e S ta tio n T ra n s m ittin g to 2 m o b ile s a t d iffe re n t p o in ts
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 159 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Closed Loop Power Control is done by using the Power Control Groups in
the Traffic Channels.
Power Control Groups in Reverse Channels
The reverse traffic channels are transmitted in 20 ms frames. Each reverse
traffic channel frame is divided into 16 slots of 1.25 ms each. Each slot is
called a Power Control Group.
One Frame consists of 192 bits.
One Power Control Group Consists of 12 bits.
With rate 1/3 Convolutional coding, we get 36 Code Symbols.
For 6 bits we have one Modulation Symbol and hence a Power Control
Group will have 6 Modulation Symbols.
The duty cycle of the transmission gate varies with the trans. data rate.
For a full rate frame (data rate 9600 bps).............16 Power Groups
For a half rate frame (data rate 4800 bps)............. 8 Power Groups
For a 1/4th rate frame (data rate 2400 bps)...........4 Power Groups
For a 1/8th rate frame (data rate 1200 bps)...........2 Power Groups
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 160 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
192 bits
0
15
1.25 msec
20 msecs
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 161 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Channel- Power Control Sub Channel

_________________________________________________________
Forward channel- Power Control Sub Channel
The block schematic of the Forward channel is reproduced in the opposite
page. The focus is the output of the interleaver and the input to the MUX.
800 Power Control bits are sent per second over a number of 20 ms forward
channel frames. This means we can transmit 1 bit every 1.25 ms. This
corresponds to the duration of one power control group in the reverse
channel.
The base station monitors the receive signal strength of a mobile over 1.25
ms. Based on the receive signal strength, the base station sends a power
control bit over the forward traffic channel, through the power control sub
channel.
The power control information is sent continuously at a rate of ONE BIT
every 1.25 ms. This gives a bit rate of 800 bps.
A 0 bit indicates that the mobile should INCREASE its output power and a
1 indicates it should DECREASE the output.
The power adjustments are done for every power control bit transmitted.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 162 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Channel - Power Control sub channel
800 bits per second

Sent over 20 ms frames
One bit every 1.25 ms
Power Control bits are added to appropriate Power Control groups.
1 means Power should be stepped down and 0 means it should be
stepped up.
Power Control for the Reverse Channel is done through the Forward
channel- power control sub channel.
9.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
19.2 kbps
Forward Tfc chl
4.4 kbps
4.8 kbps
9.6 kbps
info bits
2.0 kbps
2.4 kbps
4.8 kbps
(172/80/40/16
0.8 kbps
1.2 kbps
2.4 kbps
bits / frame
Add Frame
Convolution
symbol
Add 8 bit
Quality
coder
repetition
8.6 kbps
encoder tail
Indicators
r=1/2; K=9
4.0 kbps
2.0 kbps
19.2 kbps
0.8 kbps
pwr cont
19.2 kbps
800 bits
M
Block
U
+
+
Interleaver
X
19.2 kbps
19.2 kbps
Long Code
Mask
Long Code
Generator
64:1
Decimator
19.2 kbps
800
bps
24:1
Decimator
* A is the quadrature spreading circuitry.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 163 / 425
A*
Walsh
code n
1.2288
Mcps
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Channel-Power Control Sub Channel

_________________________________________________________
Forward Channel - Power Control Sub Channel
The power control bit on the forward channel is sent on the SECOND power
control group following the corresponding group on the reverse channel in
which the signal strength was estimated by the base station. For instance, if
the receive signal was estimated in power control group number 10 in the
reverse channel, then the power control bit is sent on power control group
number 12 in the forward channel.
The duration of a power control bit is 104.1666 Sec which is exactly twice
the duration of a modulation symbol. The power control bit replaces 2
consecutive modulation symbols on the forward traffic channel. This method
of replacing a traffic channel symbol for a power contra bit is called
SYMBOL PUNCTURING technique.
There are 16 possible starting positions for the power control bit. each
position represents one of the first 16 modulation symbols ( numbered 0 to
15 ) of a 1.25 ms period. In each of such 1.25 ms periods, a total of 24 bits
are used in the long code for scrambling purposes. These bits are
numbered 0 to 23 and bit 0 is used first and bit 23 last.
The decimal equivalent of bits 23,22,21,20 decide the position of the power
control bit.
In the diagram opposite, the value of these 4 bits is 10 and the power
control bit starts at the 10th position.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 164 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Power Control Sub Channel

20 msec = 96 mod sym = 16 Power Control Groups
1.25 msec
Reverse
Traffic
channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Base station measures rec.
signal strength and sends
power control bit.
Forward
Traffic
channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Long code bits
used for
scrambling
value=10; position of
pwr control bit
Power control bit

2 mod. symbols transmitted
1 0 1 0
20 21 22 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ......... 23
Last 4 bits
of the 24:1
Decimator
16 possible starting positions for the

power control bits.
1.25 msec = 24 modulation symbols ( 192x2/ 16)
The base station estimates receive signal strength and sends power control
bit on the power control sub channel in the forward traffic channel.
0 means mobile should INCREASE its power and 1 means it should
DECREASE its output power.
The power control bit is sent in the 1.25 msec power control group. If the
receive signal strength is measured in power group number x in the
reverse channel, the control bit is sent on the power control group number
x+2 on the forward channel.
The power control bits are scrambled using a 24:1 decimator to get a rate of
800 bps.
Value of bits 20-23 of the decimator o/p are used to decide the position of
the power control bit in the sub group.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 165 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
System Timing Aspects

_________________________________________________________
System Timing Aspects
After studying the basic formats of both the Forward and the Reverse
Channels, let us now look at how the system timings are handled in CDMA.
CDMA System Time
All base station emissions are referenced to a common system time scale
which itself uses the GPS time scale. The GPS time scale is synchronized
to another time scale called the Universal Coordinated Time( UTC). The
GPS and UTC differ by an integer number of seconds.
The start of the GPS / CDMA time scale is 6th Jan 1980 00:00:00 UTC
The diagram opposite shows the relation of System Time at various points
in the CDMA system. The long code and the zero offset pilot PN sequences
are shown at the start of the system time. The initial state of the long code is
that state in which the output of the long code generator is the first 1 after
41 consecutive 0s.
The precise zero instant of the System Time is the mid point between the
last 0 of 41 consecutive 0s and the succeeding 1 of the long code
generator.
It has been estimated that the second time alignment of the initial states of
the long code and the pilot PN sequences will not take place for more than
37 CENTURIES !!
The system time is the absolute time referenced at the base station antenna
offset by the one way or round trip delay of transmission, as appropriate.
Time measurements are referenced to the transmit and receive antennas of
the base station and the RF connector of the hand set. The System Time is
referred to in frames and is equal to an integer value of s/.02 seconds where
s is the system time in seconds.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 166 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CDMA SYSTEM TIME
Referenced to GPS time scale.

Start of the System Time is 6 Jan 1980 00:00:00
The initial states of long code and pilot PN sequences coincide with the start
of the system time.
Second time coincidence does not occur before 37 centuries!!
1...
...1 0(15)
1...
...1 0(15)
1...
Mobile
Rx
Mobile
Tx
Zero offset Q pilot PN seq

1...
1...
Long code Mask = 1 041

Zero offset I pilot PN seq
...1 0(15)
1...
...1 0(41)
1...
...1 0(15)
1...
0(15)
1...
One way delay

3 micro sec/km
0 (n) means
n consecutive
zeros
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
...1 0(41)
...1 0(15)
...1
Base
RX

Jan 6 1980
00:00:00 UTC
...1 0(41)
Jan 6 1980
00:00:00 UTC
Base
TX
Jan 6 1980
00:00:00 UTC
CDMA SYSTEM TIME REFERENCES

...1 0(41)
1... Long code Mask = 1 041
...1 0(15)
1... Zero offset I pilot PN seq
...1
0(15)
1... Zero offset Q pilot PN seq

Bangalore, India
Page 167 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 7
CALL PROCESSING
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 168 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 7
Call Processing
Objectives
Call Processing in CDMA
Acknowledgement Procedures
Mobile Station-Initialization state
Pilot Acquisition-Sub state
Sync Channel Acquisition-Sub state
Timing change substate
Mobile station idle state
Paging channel monitoring
System access state
Access Procedures
Mobile Station on traffic channel
Registration
Roaming
Authentication
Handoff procedures
Pilot sets
Pilot Strength measurements
Handoff procedures flow chart
Handoff threshold comparisons
Call Processing cases
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
168
170
171
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
195
197
199
201
209
211
217
219
221
223
Page 169 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
List the 4 different basic States of a mobile in the CDMA
environment.
Explain the basic Acknowledgment Procedures in CDMA.
List some of the important parameters used in CDMA Call
Processing.
Explain with simple diagrams, the various substates of the
mobile.
Explain the Access Procedures in CDMA.
Explain Registration Procedures in CDMA.
Explain how Authentication is performed in CDMA.
Define Hard and Soft hand-offs in CDMA.
List the types of Pilot Sets in CDMA and explain the significance
of each.
Explain hand-off procedures in CDMA.
Explain with simple signal flow diagrams, the various Call
processing steps in CDMA.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 170 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Basic Operational States
Basically, the mobile station call processing involves 4 different states, as
shown in the diagram opposite.
MOBILE STATION INITIALIZATION STATE
The mobile enters this state when it is powered ON. During this state, the
mobile selects and acquires a system. In a mixed environment where both
analog and CDMA are available, a choice is made between the two during
the initialization state.
The initialization state itself has 4 states. We will look at these later in this
section.
MOBILE STATION IDLE STATE
During this state, the mobile station monitors the messages on the PAGING
channel.
SYSTEM ACCESS STATE
In this state, the mobile communicates with the base station and exchanges
information on the ACCESS channel.
MOBILE STATION CONTROL ON THE TRAFFIC CHANNEL
This is the conversation stage when the mobile and the base station
communicate on the forward and reverse traffic channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 171 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

Basic States
Mobile station Initialization State

Mobile station idle State
System Access State
Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State
Pow er O N
In itia lis a tio n S ta te
M o n ito r s th e
P a g in g c h a n n e l.
G e ts th e p ilo t
channel and
a c q u ir e s th e
s y s te m .
Id le S ta te
R e s p o n d s to a P a g e o r
in itia te s a c a ll
S y s te m A c c e s s S ta te
T a lk s to b a s e s ta tio n o n th e
A ccess channel
G e ts a tra ffic c h a n n e l a llo tte d .
M o b ile S ta tio n c o n tro l

o n th e T ra ffic C h a n n e l
C o n v e r s a tio n
s ta te .
R e tu r n s to in titia lis a tio n s ta te a fte r c o n v e rs a tio n
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 172 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Some Important Parameters
Some of the important parameters/message types used as the mobile
goes from one state to another are given below. The messages /
parameters are:
Stored in the mobiles temporary memory {< parameter >s}
OR
Stored as a variable value that changes from time to time {<
parameter >sv}
OR
Stored within specified limits on values that vary { < parameter >sl
}
OR
Indicative of a value received by the mobile { < parameter >r }
OR
Stored permanently in the mobile { < parameter >p }
OR
Stored in semipermanent memory of the mobile {< parameter >s-p
Common Fields
For proper interaction between the mobile and the base station, certain
Acknowledgment procedures are followed, whether the mobile is in
Access channel or Paging channel or Traffic channel. In all such
Acknowledgment procedures, the mobile uses certain common fields in
its data format.
ACK_TYPE
This defines the Acknowledgment address type. This is related to the
Address_Type. Each of the states has some messages. For
example, the Paging channel has System
Parameters. When a
message is sent under this category, the Address type is for System
Parameters. The ACK_Type then corresponds to this category.
ACK_SEQ
This specifies the ACK sequence number. This is equal to the
MSG_SEQ number.
MSG_SEQ
This specifies the Message Sequence Number
ACK_REQ
This means an acknowledgment is required; 1 means ACK required
to be sent to the base station. This field is included in the message
coming FROM the base station.
VALID_ACK
0 means message doesnt include an Ack to the base station.
These fields are layer 2 fields and the ACK procedures are called Layer
2 Procedures.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 173 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Common fields
Call processing involves certain acknowledgment procedures between

the mobile and the base station.
The base station message has certain fields which control the ACK
procedures.
ADDRESS_TYPE: Specifies the type of Address.
ACK_TYPE:Mobile
ADDRESS_TYPE.
MSG_SEQ: Message Seq. Number, sent by base station
ACK_SEQ: Set by mobile while responding; equals MSG_SEQ.
ACK_REQ: Base station indicates if an ACK is required for a particular

message.
VALID_ACK: Set to 1 by mobile in its response if an ACK was asked by

the base station. After sending the ACK, the mobile does not set this
field UNTIL it receives another message from the base station that
requires an ACK.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
sets
this
field
while

Bangalore, India
responding.
Equals
Page 174 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Acknowledgement Procedures
_________________________________________________________
Acknowledgment Procedures
Based on the common fields defined in the previous page, the base station
and the mobile interact, in general, as per the procedure outlined below:
A message coming from the base station will have:

# The Address Type ( say, System Parameter Message )
# Whether ACK is required
# Message sequence number
# Other data fields.
If the base station wants an acknowledgment, it would set the

ACK_REQ field. The mobile then sends an acknowledgment
along with:
# Valid -ACK field set to 1
# ACK-TYPE field set to address type of message being
acknowledged.
# ACK-SEQ field set to MSG-SEQ number of message being
acknowledged.
If the base does not want an acknowledgment, then the mobile
verifies if the message received by it was a Paging Message. If
yes, it then sends a Paging Response Message, by setting the
Valid-ACK, ACK-TYPE and ACK-SEQ fields as mentioned above.
If the message was not a Paging channel message, then, the
mobile verifies if the previous message received by it needed an
ACK.
If the previous message needed an ACK, then the mobile sets the
Valid-ACK field to 0.
If the previous message did not require an ACK, then the mobile
sets the common fields as follows:
# Valid-ACK field 0
# ACK-TYPE field 000
# ACK-SEQ field 111.
The MSG-SEQ number for a message is INCREMENTED ONLY
WHEN the contents of the message changes. For example, if the
base station pages a mobile repeatedly, then the message
sequence number remains the same.
The foregoing is illustrated as a flow chart in the diagram opposite.

Some of the important parameters are given Appendix.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 175 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Acknowledgment Procedures
Message from the Base station

Other data fields Address Type
No
MSG-SEQ
number
ACK-REQ
Yes
=1?
A
Yes
Paging ?
same as A
Valid-ACK : 1
ACK-TYPE: address type
ACK-SEQ: MSG-SEQ number
No
Yes
Did
previous message
need an ACK ?
Valid-ACK: 0
ACK-TYPE: Address type of last message requiring an ACK
ACK-SEQ: MSG-SEQ number of last message requiring an ACK.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
No
Valid-ACK: 0
ACK-TYPE: 000
ACK-SEQ: 111
Page 176 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Station Initialization State

_________________________________________________________
This State consists of 4 sub states. In this state the mobile selects a system
to use. If the selected system is CDMA, then the mobile tries to synchronize
with the CDMA system. The 4 sub states are:
System Determination Substate

Pilot channel Acquisition sub state
Sync Channel Acquisition sub state
Timing change sub state.
System Determination Sub state

In this sub state, the mobile Determines the appropriate system to use. Choices are between
operators and between CDMA and Analog mobile systems.
If the mobile selects the CDMA system, then it sets the parameter
CDMACHS to an appropriate CDMA channel number.
After this the mobile enters the Pilot acquisition sub state.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 177 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
This State consists of 4 sub states:

System Determination Substate
Pilot channel Acquisition sub state
Sync Channel Acquisition sub state
Timing change sub state.
System Determination Sub state: In this sub state, the mobile Determines the appropriate system to use. Choices are between
operators and between CDMA and Analog mobile systems.
If the mobile selects the CDMA system, then it sets the parameter
CDMACHS to an appropriate CDMA channel number.
After this the mobile enters the Pilot acquisition sub state.
Power ON
C D M A System
Network Operator A
F1
Analog System
Network Operator B
FJ
FN
Note: F1 to FN are CDMACHS numbers.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 178 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Acquisition Sub State

_________________________________________________________
Pilot Acquisition Sub state
In this state, the mobile acquires the pilot channel.
Upon entering the Pilot Acquisition sub state, the mobile

o Tunes to the CDMACHS.
o Sets its code channel to the Pilot channel.
o Searches for the Pilot. (signal consists of all 0s )
o If it acquires Pilot within a specified time limit (T20M), the mobile
enters the Sync Channel Acquisition sub state.
o Otherwise, it RETURNS to the System Determination
Substate with an Acquisition failure indication.
If the PN offset of the CDMACH selected is TJ , TP is the propagation Delay,

then we say that the Pilot Acquisition occurs when the delay T of the locally
generated PN sequence (in the receiver) EQUALS the total delay (TJ + TP).
Note: In the diagram opposite, T20m is the maximum time to remain in the
Pilot Acquisition state and is equal to 15 seconds.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 179 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Acquisition Sub state

In this state, the mobile acquires the pilot channel.
Upon entering the Pilot Acquisition sub state, the mobile:
Tunes to the CDMACHS.
Sets its code channel to the Pilot channel.
Searches for the Pilot. ( signal consists of all 0s )
If it acquires Pilot within a specified time limit ( T20M), the mobile
enters the Sync Channel Acquisition sub state. Otherwise, it
RETURNS to the System Determination Substate with an
Acquisition failure indication.Pilot Acquisition occurs when the
delay T of the locally generated PN sequence ( in the receiver )
EQUALS the total delay ( TJ + TP ).
Power ON
sys.determine
CDMA chl number = CDMACHS
set CDMACH
set Code chl
search Pilot
Yes
Pilot got
within
T20m ?
No
T20m = 15 seconds
Sync channel Acquisition State
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 180 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Sync Channel Acquisition Sub State

_________________________________________________________
Sync channel Acquisition Sub state
In this substate, the mobile gets the system configuration and timing
information by processing the sync channel messages.
If the sync channel acquisition is successful, then the mobile enters the next
substate- i.e., the timing change sub state.
If the sync acquisition is not correctly done then the mobile RETURNS t the
System Determination substate.
The following rules are applied
The mobile returns to system determination substate... if....
The mobile does not receive a valid Sync message within a specific
time out period (defined by T21m) or,
The mobile receives a valid sync message but the Protocol revision
level supported by the mobile [MOB_P_REVP] is LESS than the
minimum level supported by the base stain [MIN_P_REVr]
If the mobile receives the sync message properly and MOB_P_REVP is

GREATER than MIN_P_REVr , the mobile stores the following info from the
sync message:
P_REVS = P_REVr
MIN_P_REVS = MIN_P_REVr
SIDS = SIDr
NIDS = NIDr
PILOT_PNs = PILOT_PNr
SYS_TIMES = SYS_TIMEr
PRATS = PRATr
Mobile would ignore any other fields coming at the end of the message
which are not defined according to MOB_P_REVP, stored permanently in
the handset.
Note: In the diagram opposite, T21m is the maximum time to receive a valid
Sync channel message and is equal to 1 second.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 181 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Sync Channel Acquisition Substate
Power ON
System Dtermine
Pilot Acquisition
Sync Acquisition
T21m = 1 second
yes
no
MOB_P_REV
less than
MIN_P_REV ?
Timing change state
< T21m ?
yes
The mobile stores the following
if sync aquisition is successful:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
no
P_REVS = P_REVr
MIN_P_REVS = MIN_P_REVr
SIDS = SIDr
NIDS = NIDr
PILOT_PNs = PILOT_PNr
SYS_TIMES = SYS_TIMEr
PRATS = PRATr

Bangalore, India
Page 182 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Timing Change Substate

_________________________________________________________
Timing Change Substate
In this state the mobile aligns itself with the System Time and the Long code
timing by using the parameters LC_STATES, PILOT_PNS and the
SYS_TIMES received through the Sync Message.
To understand the process we must recapitulate the structure of the Sync
frames.
The Sync frame is basically 26.666... msec long and has 32,768
chips at a speed of 1.2288 Mega Chips per sec.
A sync channel super frame is obtained by combining 3 sync
channel frame and it has 80 msec duration.
Beginning of every 25th Sync channel super frame, with a ZERO
offset Pilot PN sequence aligns with EVEN seconds.
We define a Super frame as the Current Super Frame as the
one during which the end of the sync message is received.
The SYSTEM TIME is defined as TS which is 320 msec PAST the
end of the current super frame.
If there is a non zero Pilot PN offset, then the System Time also
has the same offset, being equal to 320 msec past the end of the
current super frame.
The mobile receives the Long Code to be used from the Sync
message and loads it into a shift register.
The mobile waits till reaching the system time TS and at this point
starts SHIFTING the contents of the shift register at a speed of
1.2288 Mcps.
At this point we say that Long Code Synchronization is achieved.
After a successful Timing Change, the mobile tunes to a Paging Channel to

enter the next state viz., the MOBILE STATION IDLE STATE.
The Timing Change mechanism is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 183 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Timing change Sub state

Beginning of every 25 Sync superframe
with a zero Offset Pilot PN sequence
coincides with even seconds.
Even Second
Marks
Sync chl
superframe
= 80 msec
Sync chl associated

with a zero offset
Pilot PN sequence
TS
320 msec
c
Pilot PNsequence
Offset
Sync chl associated

with a Non zero offset
Pilot PN sequence
Sync chl frame

= 80/3=26.666..msec
TS
end of sync
message
320 msec
c
Current super frame
Traffic channel frame

= 20 msec.
Paging/traffic channels
with FRAME_OFFSET
equal to zero, for any
Pilot PN sequence offset
Long Code shifted

out of shift register
at this point.
Illustration of Timing change mechanism.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 184 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Station Idle State

_________________________________________________________
MOBILE STATION IDLE STATE
In this state, the mobile monitors the Paging channel so that it Receives messages and orders
Initiates a registration
Receives an incoming call
Initiates a call
Initiates a message transmission
On entering this state the Mobile sets its Walsh Code to W1 , the first
Primary Paging Channel. Based on the information received on the sync
channel, the mobile also sets is PRATS to PRATr .
Paging Channel Monitoring Procedures
The Paging Channel is divided into a number of slots of 80 msec duration
each. The mobile monitors the paging channel in a slot assigned to it. This
is similar to the Paging groups that we have in GSM and basically helps
conserve the mobile battery power.
Slotted Mode and Non slotted Modes
When a mobile monitors the Paging Channel only during specific slots
assigned to it, we say that it is operating in THE SLOTTED Mode.
Otherwise the mobile operates in the NON SLOTTED Mode. In the non
slotted mode, the paging information for the mobile can come in any of the
paging slots. Therefore in this mode the mobile has to monitor the Paging
Channel at ALL times, over ALL the slots.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 185 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Station Idle State
Mobile sets its Walsh Code to W1

Sets PRATs to PRATr
Monitors Paging Channel.
Receives messages and orders
Initiates a registration
Receives an incoming call
Initiates a call
Initiates a message transmission
Paging channel divided into a number of paging slots of 80 ms duration
each.
Mobile operates in 2 modes
Slotted Mode
Monitors Paging channel only during specific assigned slots.

Slotted mode operation is during the Mobile idle state only.
Non Slotted Mode
Mobile can get Paging messages in any of the paging slots and hence
HAS to monitor all the slots all the time.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 186 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Paging Channel Monitoring

_________________________________________________________
Mobile Idle State - Paging Channel Monitoring
A mobile operating in the slotted mode generally monitors the paging
channel for one or two slots per cycle. The mobile can specify its preferred
slot cycle using the field SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX in its message towards the
base station.
The minimum slot cycle length is 16 slots of 80 msec each and is equal to
1.28 seconds.
The slot cycle length , in general, is given by: T = 2I, where I is the selected
slot cycle index.
The specific slot during which the mobile looks at the paging channel is
given by:
SLOT_NUM = t/4 modulo 2048
The maximum number of paging slots in one cycle is 2048.
t/4 is the largest integer of t/4 where t is the system time.
t/4 modulo 2048 means the remainder of dividing t/4 by 2048.
The monitoring process is shown in the diagram opposite.
The figure gives an example for a slot cycle length of 1.28 seconds. The
computed value of SLOT_NUM is taken as 4 in this example.
The mobile starts monitoring the paging channel at the beginning of the slot
for which SLOT_NUM equals 4. The NEXT slot in which the mobile will look
at the paging channel again is 16 slots later; i.e., in that slot for which
SLOT_NUM equals 20.
In the slotted mode, the page messages contain a field called
MORE_PAGES.
If this field is set to 0 , it means that the remainder of the slot will have no
more messages. With this the mobile can stop monitoring the Paging
Channel as soon as possible.
If the mobile reports the loss of a paging channel, then it will enter the
System Determination Substate in the Mobile Initialization State.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 187 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Idle State - Paging Channel Monitoring
Mobile uses SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX for deciding the slot in which it should

monitor paging channel.
Slotcycle length is given by T = 2I where I is the slot cycle index chosen.
The maximum number of paging slots in one cycle is 2048.
Minimum slot cycle length is 1.28 secs. ( 16 slots of 80 msec each ).

The specific slot during which the mobile looks at the paging channel is
given by:
SLOT_NUM = t/4 modulo 2048
t/4 is the largest integer of t/4 where t is the system time.
t/4 modulo 2048 means the remainder of dividing t/4 by 2048.
If mobile monitors paging channel when SLO_NUM is say, 4, then it would
look at the paging 16 slots later.
The paging message has a field MORE_PAGES. If this 0, it means there
are no more pages and the mobile can stop monitoring as early as possible.
System time
1.28 sec
2047
0 1 2 3
Mobile non active
. . . . ....... . . .
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
non active
A means Reacquisition of the CDMA system.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
20
... . . . ....... . . . .....
non active
monitor paging channel

Bangalore, India
Page 188 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
System Access state

_________________________________________________________
System Access State
After successful initialization and idle states, the mobile enters the System
Access State which has the following Sub States:
o Upgrade Overhead Information Substate: Here, the mobile
monitors the Paging Channel until it has a current set of overhead
messages.
o Origination Substate: Here, the mobile sends an Origination
Message to the base station.
o Page Response Substate
o Mobile Station Order/Message response Substate: Here, the
mobile responds to a message or order from the base station.
o Registration Access Substate: Here, the mobile sends a
Registration Message to the base station.
o Mobile Station Message transmission Substate: Here, the mobile
sends a Data Burst Message to the base station.
The diagram opposite shows the various substates described above.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 189 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
System Access State
Enter from Mobile Station Idle State
Update Overhead Information Substate
MS Order/ Msg
resp. sub state
Regn. Access
Substate
Regn. Access
Substate
MS Message
Transmission
Substate
MS Message
Transmission
Substate
MS
Idle State
MS
Idle State
Page Resp.
Substate
MS
Idle State
Page Resp.
Substate
MS control on
Traffic Chl
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
MS control on
Traffic Chl
Page 190 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Procedures
_________________________________________________________
Access Procedures - An overview
1. The mobile transmission on the Access channel is based on a
random access procedure. The key parameters for this random
access procedure are contained in the Access Parameter Message
sent by the base station.
2. The mobile sends an Access Probe at a low power level to start with.
The power of the mobile is increased in steps till it gets a response
from the base station. The mobile transmits the SAME message in
each successive access probe it transmits.
3. The access probe consists of a an ACCESS CHANNEL PRE
AMBLE and an ACCESS CHANNEL MESSAGE CAPSULE.
4. The Access channel used by the mobile is chosen pseudo randomly
from the Access channels available for the current paging channel. (
32 access channels per paging channel ).
5. There are 2 types of messages that can be sent on the Access
channel:
a. A response message
b. A request message.
6. The procedures for these 2 types are different.
7. For every access probe sequence, a back off delay specified by RS=
1+BKOFF slots is generated pseudo randomly. For request access
probes, an additional random delay called the Persistence delay PD
is also added.
8. Timing between access probes of an access probe sequence is also
generated pseudo randomly. After every access probe, the mobile
waits for a specified period for a response from the base station. If an
acknowledgment is received, the access probe sequence ends. If not
the next access probe is sent after an ADDITIONAL back off delay
RT= 0 to 1+PROBE_BKOFF slots.
The access procedures are illustrated in the following pages.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 191 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Procedures:
Mobile sends access probes at random.

It sends an ACCESS PROBE at a low power level initially.
It increases power in steps till it gets a response from the base station.
Access messages could be response messages or request messages.
Start of each access probe is decided pseudo randomly.
A back off delay RS= 0 to 1+BKOFF is also generated pseudo randomly.
For REQUEST probes, an additional delay called PERSISTENCE delay
PD is also added.
Timing BETWEEN successive access probes is also generated pseudo
randomly.
After the access probe, the mobile waits for a response for a specified
time.
If no response is received it sends the next probe after an ADDITIONAL
back off delay RT = 0 to 1+PROBE_BKOFF slots.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 192 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Procedures
_________________________________________________________
Access Procedures
With reference to the diagram opposite, the following may be noted:
IP .... Initial Open Loop Power
= -73-Mean i/p pwr + NOM_PWR + INIT_PWR
PD ... Persistence delay (delay continues slot by slot until the test is passed)
RA . Random Access Channel Number = 0 to 31
PI .. Power Increment = 0 to 7 dB
Number of Steps = 16 max. ( 1+15)
TA ... Acknowledgment response time out delay.
= 80 x ( 2 + ACC_TMO ); time out from end of slot.
= 160 to 1360 msec.
ACC_TMO = 0 to 15.
RT ... Probe backoff;
Random number between 0 and 1 + PROBE_BKOFF.
= 0 to 15 slots.
RS ... Seq. Backoff; random between 0 and 1+ BKOFF.
= 0 to 16 slots.
Persistence delay PD is applicable only for REQUEST probes.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 193 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Procedures
Access Probe Sequence

Open Loop Power Control.
NUM_STEP - 16 max.
PWR_STEP
PWR_STEP
PWR_STEP
Initial
Power
TA RT
TA
Seq 1
RT
TA
Seq 2
RS
System Time
RT
Seq 3
RS
Seq 15 max
RS
Response Message Access Attempt

Seq 1
RS
Seq 2
PD
RS
Seq 3
PD
RS
Seq 15 max
PD
Request Message Access Attempt
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 194 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile station on Traffic Channel

_________________________________________________________
Mobile Station control on the Traffic Channel State
In this state, the mobile communicates with the base station using the
forward and Reverse Traffic Channels.
There are 5 substates as illustrated in the diagram opposite.
Traffic Channel Initialization Substate
In this state the mobile verifies it can receive the forward traffic channel and
starts transmitting on the Reverse traffic Channel.
Waiting for Order Substate
In this state, the mobile waits for an Alert with information message .
Waiting for Mobile Station Answer substate
In this state, the mobile waits for the user to answer the call.
Conversation Substate
Here, the mobile exchanges Primary Traffic data packets with the base
station.
Release Substate
In this case, the mobile disconnects a call.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 195 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Control On Traffic Channel State

Enter from System Access State
Traffic channel
Initialisation substate
Mobile terminated
call; it receives
a Base station
Ack order on the
Fwd Tfc channel
Waiting for order

substate
Receives Maintenance order or
Alert with info message.
Receives
release
order
Waiting for mobile station

Answer Substate
MS user
answers.
Mobile
originated Call.
It receives a
Base station
Ack order
on theFwd Tfc
Channel
receives
maintenance
order
Conversation
Substate
MS releases call or
gets release order
Release Substate
Receives Alert
with information
Message
System Determination
Substate of Initialisation state.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 196 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Registration
_________________________________________________________
REGISTRATION
Registration is a process by which the mobile tells the base station about its
whereabouts. It notifies the base station of its Location, status, identification,
slot cycle and other characteristics such as station class mark and protocol
revision.
The PURPOSE of registration is to enable the base station to PAGE the
mobile in case of an incoming call.
For operation in the slotted index mode, the mobile gives the
SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX parameter so that the base station can determine
the slots which the mobile could monitor.
The CDMA system supports 9 types of Registration
o Power-Up Registration
o Power-Down Registration
o Timer based Registration: Here the mobile performs a registration
when a timer expires.
o Distance Based Registration: The mobile performs a registration
when the distance between the current base station and the one
in which it had last registered exceeds a threshold.
o Zone Based Registration: The mobile registers when it enters a
new zone.
o Parameter Change Registration: The mobile does a registration
when it enters a new system or some of the stored parameters
change.
o Ordered Registration: The mobile registers when the base station
asks for it.
o Implicit registration: When a mobile station sends a successful
Origination message or a Page
Response message,
the base station can infer the mobiles location. This is called
Implicit Registration.
o Traffic Channel Registration: Here the base station tells the
mobile it is registered.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 197 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Registration
Registration tells the base station about the mobiles whereabouts.

It helps the base station to Page the mobile in case of an incoming call.
There are 9 different types of Registration:
1. Power- Up Registration
2. Power-down Registration
3. Timer Based Registration
4. Distance Based Registration
5. Zone Based Registration
6. Parameter Change Registration
7. Ordered Registration
8. Implicit Registration
9. Traffic Channel Registration
Only Power up and Power down registrations are presently supported.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 198 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Roaming
_________________________________________________________
Roaming
Definition of Systems and Networks
A base station is a member of a Cellular System and Network.
A network is a sub set of a System.
A System is given a unique identity called SID and a network within the
system is identified by NID.
A network is identified by the pair ( SID, NID ).
The following basic rules apply:
SID = 0 is reserved.
NID = 0 is reserved.
NID = 216 - 1 ( = 65535 ) is reserved to indicate that the mobile
considers the entire SID ( regardless of NID ) as HOME. ( i.e.,
non roaming ).
The diagram opposite shows an example of systems and networks.
The mobile has a list of one or more home ( non roaming ) SID-NID pairs. If
the SID-NID received on the System Parameters Message does not match
any of the mobiles non roaming SID-NID pairs, then we say that the mobile
is roaming.
There are 2 types of roaming
A mobile station is called a foreign NID roamer, IF the SIDs are equal
but the NIDs are different in the received and stored lists of SID and NID.
A mobile is called a foreign SID roamer, if the NIDs match while the
SIDs are different.
For example, let the mobile have three SID-NID pairs, say (2,3), (2,0) and
(3,0).If the SID-NID received from the base station is (2,3), then the mobile
is not roaming because the base stations SID-NID matches with one of the
pairs in the stored list in the mobile. If the received pair is (2,7) then the
mobile is roaming and is an NID roamer and if the received pair is (4,0),
then the mobile is roaming and it is an SID roamer.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 199 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Definition of Systems and Networks
A base station is a member of a Cellular System and network A network is a

sub set of a System.
A network is identified by the pair ( SID, NID ).
The following basic rules apply:
SID = 0 is reserved.
NID = 0 is reserved.
NID = 216 - 1 ( = 65535 ) is reserved to indicate that the mobile
considers the entire SID ( regardless of NID ) as HOME. ( i.e., non
roaming ).
Roaming
A mobile is an NID roamer if SIDr = SIDS and the NIDs do not match.
It is an SID roamer, if the NIDs match and the SIDs dont.
NID = q
SID = i
SID = j
NID = p
NID = r
SID = k
FOREIGN NID ROAMER :

SID = l
NIDR
NIDS.
FOREIGN SID ROAMER :

SIDR = SIDS
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 200 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Authentication
_________________________________________________________
Authentication
Authentication is a process by which the base station confirms the identity of
the mobile station.
There is a 128 bit data called the Shared Secret Data ( SSD ) which is
stored in the semi permanent memory of the mobile. We say that the
authentication operation is successful only when the mobile and the base
station possess the same SSD.
Authentication Parameters
1. Random challenge Number (RAND): This is a 32 bit sequence sent by
the base station. This is sent on the ACCESS PARAMETERS in the
Paging Channel. This is used in conjunction with SSD and other
parameters for authenticating the mobile.
2. Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This is a 32bit sequence that uniquely
defines the mobile set. Bits 0 to 17 are for the serial number of the
mobile, bits 18 to 23 are reserved and the remaining bits are for
Manufacturers code.
3. Mobile Identification Number (MIN): This is a 34 bit sequence. This is
derived from a 10 digit Telephone Directory number of the mobile. The
first 24 bits ( least significant bits ) are called MIN 1. and the remaining
bits are called MIN 2.
4. Shared Secret Data (SSD): This is a 128bit data pattern stored in the
mobile. This is similar to the Ki in GSM. The first subset of 64 bits called
SSD-A is used for authentication purposes. The next subset of 64 bits,
SSD-B is used for supporting ciphering procedures.
5. Call History Parameter (COUNTS-P): This is a modulo 64 count held in
the semi permanent memory of the mobile and is updated upon the
receipt of a Parameter Update Order from the base station.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 201 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Authentication
Used by the base station for authenticating the mobile.

Authentication is successful only when the mobile and the base station possess
the same Shared Secret Data (SSD).
The parameters used for authentication are:
Electronic Serial Number ( ESN).
Mobile Identification Number (MIN).
Random Challenge Memory (RAND).
Shared Secret Data (SSD).
Call History Parameter (COUNTS-P)
Shared Secret Data ( S S D )

SSD - A ( 64 bits )
SSD - B ( 64 bits )
Electronic Serial Number ( E S N )

31
24
23
Mfr Code
18 17
Reserved
Serial number
Mobile Identification Number ( M I N )

M I N 2 ( 10 MSBs )
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
M I N 1 ( 24 LSBs )

Bangalore, India
Page 202 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Authentication during Registration Case1

_________________________________________________________
Case 1: Authentication during Registration
The field AUTH in the System Parameters Message is set to 01 for
enabling the Standard Authentication Mode.
The mobile uses the RAND, ESN, MIN 1 and SSD-A data for the
authentication process. It runs the Authentication Procedure to generate an
18 bit long Authentication Signature through the AUTHR field in the
Registration Message.
The mobile sends the AUTHR and a parameter called RANDC,(8 MSBs of
RAND) to the base station.
The base station compares the RANDC received from the mobile with its
internally stored value of RAND. In fact it is derived from the RANDC coming
from the mobile.
The base station also retrieves the ESN and MIN of the mobile from its data
base based on the COUNT value received from the mobile.
It runs the Authentication Procedure locally, by using the internally stored
SSD-A and generates its own AUTHR. If the AUTHRmobile matches the
AUTHRbase, then the authentication is successful.
If the comparisons fail, then the base stain may either do a Unique
Challenge-Response procedure OR initiate an SSD Update sequence.
The process is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 203 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 1:
Authentication During Registration:

Derived from
RANDC
Mobile end.
RAND ESN
MIN 1
SSD-A
Derived from
COUNT
RAND ESN
Authentication
Algorithm
MIN 1
Derived from
local memory
SSD-A
Authentication
Algorithm
RANDC
AUTHRm
(18 bits)
AUTHRb
(18 bits)
Yes
Authentication Successful
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
No
AUTHRm = AUTHRb ?
Perform Unique Challenge-Response

or
SSD Update Procedure

Bangalore, India
Page 204 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Unique Challenge Response Procedure

_________________________________________________________
Case 2: Unique Challenge-Response Procedure
This is initiated by the base stain in the event of an unsuccessful
authentication attempt. This can be done either on the Paging and Access
Channels or on the Forward & Reverse Traffic Channels.
The base station sends to the mobile an Authentication Challenge Message.
It generates a 24 bit data called RANDU and sends it on the Challenge
Message.
The mobile sets the authentication parameters using 24 MSBs of RANDU
and 8 MSBs of MIN 2 in its RAND field.
The mobile performs an authentication procedure and returns the AUTHR to
the base station.
The base station also does a similar calculation, using the internal
parameters including the SSD-A.
If the comparison fails, then the base station may either deny further access
to the mobile or drop the call in progress or initiate an SSD Update
Procedure.
The above mentioned process is illustrated in the diagram opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 205 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 2:
Unique Challenge-Response Procedure:
Mobile receives Authentication Challenge
RANDU MIN 2 ESN MIN 1

24 bits 8 bits
SSD-A
Derived from
RANDC
Derived from
COUNT
RANDU MIN 2 ESN MIN 1

24 bits 8 bits
Derived from
local memory
SSD-A
RAND
Authentication
Algorithm
Authentication
Algorithm
AUTHR and
RANDC
AUTHRb
(18 bits)
AUTHRm
(18 bits)
Yes
Authentication Successful
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
AUTHRm = AUTHRb ?
No
Deny Access or
Drop Call in Progress or
Initiate SSD Update Procedure.

Bangalore, India
Page 206 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Case 3: SSD Update Procedure
This is done when an authentication procedure fails. This is initiated by the
base station. An SSD_Generation Procedure is used in conjunction with
mobile specific data and the Mobiles A-Key.
The A-Key of the mobile is 64 bits long and is unique to the mobile. It is
known only to the mobile and the HLR. It is similar to the Ki in GSM.
The update procedure is indicated in the diagram in the opposite page.
The base station sends an SSD Update Message either on the Paging
Channel or the Forward Traffic Channel. It generates an RANDSSD number
and sends it on the update message.
The mobile then does an SSD_Generation procedures and obtains new
values for SSD-A and SSD-B.
After this the mobile generates a 32 bit random number called RANDBS
and sends it on a Base Station Challenge Order in the Access Channel or
the Reverse Traffic Channel.
Both the mobile and base stations perform the Authentication procedures to
get AUTHBS values and these are compared. For this comparison, the base
stations ends its AUTHBS through a Base Station Challenge Confirmation
Order.
If the comparisons match then the mobile performs an SSD update
procedure at the end of which it sends an SSD Update Confirmation Order
to the base station. It also sets the SSD-A and SSD-B values to the new
values. The base stain also sets its corresponding parameters to the new
values.
If the comparison fails, then the mobile discards the new values of SSD-A
and SSD-B and send an SSD Update Rejection Order to the base station.
Again, if the mobile does not receive the Base Station Challenge
Confirmation Order within a time limit set by the timer T64m,(= 10 sec) the
new values are discarded and the up date procedure is terminated.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 207 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 3:

Mobile Station
Base Station
SSD Update Message
RANDSSD
RANDSSD (56)
ESN
A-Key (64 bits)
RANDSSD (56)
SSD_Generation
Procedure
SSD-A New
SSD-A New
SSD-B New
Base Stn Challenge Order

RANDBS
Authentication Procedure
AUTHBSm = AUTHBSb ?
A-Key (64 bits)
SSD_Generation
Procedure
SSD-B New
RANDBS
ESN
Authentication Procedure
Base Stn Challenge Confirm

Yes... SSD Update Confirmation Order
No ... SSD Update Rejection Order
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 208 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Handoff Procedures
_________________________________________________________
Hand-off Procedures
There are basically 3 major types of Hand-offs in CDMA.
Soft hand-offs
These are Hand-offs in which the mobile initiates communications with a
neighbouring base station WITHOUT breaking communications with the old
base station. We also define a softer hand-off as one that takes place
between sectors of the same cell site. Soft hand-offs are done only between
cells having the same CDMA channel ( frequency ) assignments. A soft
hand-off is a MAKE BEFORE BREAK type of connection.
A key benefit of soft hand-off is the diversity it provides at the boundaries of
cells. ( this is because, at the boundaries, the mobile is talking to both the
new and old base stations at the same frequency.) Diversity on the Reverse
Channel means that :o Less Power is needed on the Reverse Traffic Channel
o This means that the Interference in the Reverse channel is
minimum
o Hence this results in an Optimum Reverse Link capacity.
Hard Hand-offs
There are 2 types:
o CDMA - CDMA Hand-off: Here, the mobile is transitioned
between disjoint cells having different frequency assignments.
o CDMA-Analog Hand-offs: Here, the mobile moves from a CDMA
traffic channel to an analog channel. Hard hand-offs are like
BREAK BEFORE MAKE connections.
The concepts of soft and hard hand-offs are illustrated in the diagram
opposite.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 209 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Hand-off Procedures:
Soft Hand-offs:
Between Cells of the same frequency.
Connection maintained at all times. Mobile talks to both old and new base
stations.
Provides diversity for the traffic channels near cell boundaries; this results in
optimum reverse channel capacity.
Make before Break connections.

Hard Hand-offs:
Between disjoint cells.
CDMA - CDMA cells
CDMA - Analog cells.
Break before Make connections.
Cell B
Cell A
Cell B
Mobile on Cell B
Cell B
Cell A
Cell B
Cell A
Soft Handoff to Cell B
Hard Handoff example:
Cell A
Mobile on Cell B
Mobile on Cell A
Cell B
Cell A
Mobile on Cell A
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 210 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Sets
_________________________________________________________
Pilot Sets
The hand-off mechanism is basically triggered by the level of the pilot
signals coming from the neighbouring cells. (A pilot is identified by a PILOT
channel with a Pilot sequence offset and a specific frequency assignment. A
pilot is associated with the forward Traffic Channels of the same CDMA
channel. All pilots in a pilot set , therefore , have the same frequency
assignment. )
The mobile looks for pilots on the current CDMA frequency assignment to
detect the presence of CDMA channels. When it detects a pilot that is
different from its present pilot set and whose power level is above a certain
threshold, the mobile sends a Pilot Measurement Message to the base
station. The latter ten assigns a traffic channel associated with that Pilot
channel and asks the mobile to do a soft hand-off.
Thus the entire operation of hand-offs is dependent on searching for the
pilot. The Pilot search parameters and the rules for measurement of pilot
strength are governed by the following SETs of pilots:
Active Set
The pilots associated with the Forward Traffic Channels assigned to the
mobile station.
Candidate Set
Those pilots which are NOT in the current Active Set but have sufficient
signal strength to qualify for hand-off.
Neighbour Set
This contains a list of neighbouring pilots whose signal strengths are strong
enough to make them candidate pilots. This list is entered through the data
base. Even if a pilot from an adjoining cell is very strong, the mobile will not
look at if it is NOT menioned in the neighbour list.
Remaining Set
The set of all pilots other than the three types mentioned above.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 211 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Sets
Hand-offs are done by measuring pilot signal strengths from neighbouring

cells.
Measurement Message sent to base station when a pilot of adequate
strength, not belonging to the mobiles current assignment of traffic
channels is detected.
Hand-off process is dependent on pilot searches.
Pilots can be grouped in 4 Sets:
ACTIVE SET
CANDIDATE SET
NEIGHBOURING SET
REMAINING SET
ACTIVE SET
CANDIDATE SET
NEIGHBOUR SET
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
REMAINING SET

Bangalore, India
Page 212 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot search-Search Windows

_________________________________________________________
Pilot Search - Search Windows
We said that the mobile identifies a pilot with reference to its PN offset.
However, while looking for a pilot, the mobile is NOT limited to the exact
offset of the short PN code.
Remember the mobile environment is full of multi paths caused by
reflections. This means that the multi path components of the pilot will arrive
a few chips LATER than the direct path.
The Mobile Unit searches for the pilot over a SEARCH WINDOW. The
mobile unit centres the search window for each Pilot in the Active Set and
the Candidate Set, around the earliest arriving multipath component of the
pilot.
For the Neighbour and Candidate Sets, the mobile centres the search
window around the pilots PN offset using the mobiles time reference.
Window sizes are specified in Number of short PN chips as shown in the
Table given below.
The SRCH_WIN values are the stored values in the mobile. The values
given in the table specify the total search range.
For example, if the value for SRCH_WIN_AS = 10, it means a 100 chips
search window or 50 PN chips around the search window centre.
SRCH_WIN_AS
SRCH_WIN_NS
SRCH_WIN_RS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Window Size in
PN Chips.
4
6
8
10
14
20
28
40
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
SRCH_WIN_AS
SRCH_WIN_NS
SRCH_WIN_RS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Bangalore, India
Window Size in
PN Chips.
60
80
100
130
160
226
320
452
Page 213 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Search - Search Windows
Pilot Search is around a Search window

Multipath components arrive later than the direct path component of the
pilot.
For Active and Candidate sets, window is centered around the earliest
arriving multipath component of the pilot.
For the other sets, it is around the short Code PN offset as per the
mobiles timing reference.
window sizes are specified in units of PN chips.
Search windows
Multipath components in a search window
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 214 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Parameters Used in Hand-offs

_________________________________________________________
The following parameters are very important in hand-off situations:
o T_ADDS: This is the PILOT DETECTION THRESHOLD.
o T_COMPS:This is the ACTIVE SET Vs CANDIDATE
COMPARISON THRESHOLD.
o T_DROPS: This is the PILOT DROP THRESHOLD.
o T_TDROPS: This is the PILOT DROP TIMER VALUE.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
SET
Page 215 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

o T_ADDS: This is the PILOT DETECTION THRESHOLD.
o T_COMPS:This is the ACTIVE SET Vs CANDIDATE
COMPARISON THRESHOLD.
o T_DROPS: This is the PILOT DROP THRESHOLD.
o T_TDROPS: This is the PILOT DROP TIMER VALUE.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
SET
Page 216 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Strength - Measurements

_________________________________________________________
Pilot Strength Measurements
The mobile station helps the base station in the hand-off process by
measuring the pilot strength from the neighbors and reporting the measured
value back to the base station. The mobile uses the searcher element in
the Rake receiver for this purpose. The mobile calculates the EC / N0 of the
received pilot signal for determining the signal strength. In general, the
mobile transmits a Pilot Strength Measurement Message to the base station
(the current, active base station) under the following conditions:
o One of the pilots in the Active Set has DROPPED below the
threshold T_DROPS and the timer T_TDROP has expired.
The mobile maintains a hand-off timer (T_TDROP) for each pilot
in the Active and candidate sets. It starts the timer whenever the
pilot strength falls below T_DROP. It resets and DISABLES the
timer as and when the signal strength rises above the threshold.
When T_TDROP is ZERO, the mobile considers that the timer
has expired within 100 ms of enabling it. Otherwise, it considers
the timer expired WITHIN 10 % of the timer expiration value
shown in the Table given below for T_TDROPS.
o The strength of a Pilot in the Candidate Set exceeds the level of a
pilot in the Active Set by a value T_COMPS x 0.5
o The strength of a pilot in the Neighbor Set or the Remaining Set
exceeds the Pilot Detection Threshold T_ADDS.
T_TDROP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Timer Expiration
= o.1 sec
1
2
4
6
9
13
19
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
T_TDROP
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Bangalore, India
Timer Expiration
27
39
55
79
112
159
225
319
Page 217 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Strength Measurements
Hand-off process is based on pilot strength of neighboring cells.
Mobile determines pilot strength from EC / N0 of the pilots from the near by
cells.
Pilot Strength Measurement Message to base station is sent when: Active Set Pilot falls below T_DROPS and the timer T_TDROPS has
expired.
Candidate set Pilot strength exceeds that of Active set by T_COMPS x
0.5
Neighbor Set or Remaining Set pilot strengths exceed threshold
T_ADDS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 218 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Hand-off Procedures flow chart

_________________________________________________________
Hand-off Procedures
The Hand-off procedure is depicted in the diagram opposite.
If the pilot from the neighboring cell exceeds the pilot level in the Active set
of the current set by T_COMP x 0.5, then the mobile sends a measurement
report to the base station.
The latter sends the mobile a Hand-off Direction Message, which consists
of:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
The Hand-off Message Direction Message Sequence Number

CDMA Channel Assignments
Search Window Size
Active Set list which includes both the old and new pilots
T_ADD ( PILOT DETECTION THRESHOLD )
T_DROP ( PILOT DROP THRESHOLD )
T_TDROP ( PILOT DROP TIMER )
T_COMP ( ACTIVE Vs CANDIDATE COMPARISON THRESHOLD )
The mobile acquires the new base station while maintaining the link with the
old base station.
The mobile sends a Hand-off Completion Message to both the base
stations. At this point we say that the mobile is in Soft Hand-off.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 219 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Hand-off Procedure - a Flow Chart
Search for pilot
Neighbor Set
No
Remaining Set
PX exceeds T_ADD ?
Yes
1. Move the pilot to Candidate Set
2. Send Measurement Report to
base station.
PX
Yes
exceeds an active pilot by
T_COMP x 0.5 ?
Send Measurement Report
Keep Pilot in Candidate Set
Receive H/O Direction Message
Move pilot to Active Set
Send Handoff Completion Message
No
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 220 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Hand-off threshold comparisons

_________________________________________________________
Hand-off Threshold Comparisons
Fig.(a) in the opposite shows an example of messages exchanged between
the mobile and the base station during a typical hand-off process.
1. Pilot Strength exceeds T_ADD. Mobile sends a measurement report
to the base and TRANSFERS the pilot to Candidate Set.
2. Base station sends a Hand-off Direction Message.
3. Mobile TRANSFERS the pilot to the Active Set and sends a Hand-off
Completion Message to the base station.
4. Pilot Strength falls below T_DROP. Mobile starts hand-off drop timer.
5. Hand-off drop timer expires. Mobile sends a measurement report.
6. Base station sends a Hand-off Direction Message.
7. Mobile moves the pilot from the Active Set to the Neighbour Set and
sends a Hand-off Completion Message.
Figure (b) illustrates the messaging triggered by a pilot in the candidate Set
as its strength gradually rises above the active set pilots.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 221 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Hand-off Threshold Comparisons
Figure ( a ): Hand-off Threshold Example:

Pilot
Strength
T_ADD
T_DROP
1
Neighbour Set
2 3
Cand.
Set
Active Set
Figure ( b ) Pilot Measurement triggered by a Candidate Set

Pilot
Strength
Pilot 1
Time
7
Neighbour Set
Pilot P0
T_COMP x 0.5 dB
T_COMP x 0.5 dB
Pilot 2
T_ADD
Time
t0
t0 - P0 greater than T_ADD
t1 - P0 greater than P1 + T_COMP x 0.5
t2 - P0 greater than P2 + T_COMP x 0.5
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
t1

Bangalore, India
t2
Page 222 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case1:Mobile Originated Call

_________________________________________________________
Case 1: Mobile Originated call
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 223 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 1: Mobile Originated call

Mobile Station
Base Station
Access channel
Sends Origination Message
Receives Origination Message.

Sets up a Traffic Channel
Paging Channel
Starts sending Null Tfc data.
Receives Paging channel
Sends Channel Assignment
Sets up Reverse Traffic Channel
Messagge
Receives N5m consecutive valid frames. Reverse Tfc Channel
Starts sending Traffic Channel Preamble
Acquires Reverse Tfc Channel.
Forward Tfc Channel
Receives Ack from base station
Sends Base Station Ack Order.
Starts sending Null Traffic data.
Starts processing Primary Traffic in
accordance with Service option 1.
Sends Origination continuation

Message
Receives Ring back tone.
Reverse Tfc Channel

Forward Tfc Channel Receives data from mobile.
Sends Service Option Response
Order.
Reverse Tfc Channel
Forward Tfc Channel
Sends Alert with Info. Message
Forward Tfc Channel Called Sub Answers. Alert
message sent again ( tone off )
Ring stops
Conversation Starts
Conversation
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 224 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case2: Mobile Terminated call

_________________________________________________________
Case 2: Mobile Terminated call
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 225 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 2: Mobile Terminated Call:

Base Station
Mobile Station
Sends Page Message or Slotted

Page Message
Receives Page response.
Sets up traffic channel
Begins sending Null traffic data
Sends Channel Assignment
Paging channel
Access Channel
Paging channel
Reverse Traffic channel
Acquires Reverse Traffic Channel

Sends Base Station Ack Order
Sends Service Option Response
Order.
Sends Paging Response Message
Receives N5m consecutive frames

Sets up reverse Trafic channel
Sends Traffic Channel Preamble
Forward Traffic channel
Processes Primary Tfc data in

accordance with service option 1.
Sends Alert with Info Message
Forward Traffic channel

Conversation
Starts ringing
User answers
Stops Ringing
Sends Connect Order
Conversation
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 226 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Call Disconnect
_________________________________________________________
Case 3: Mobile Initiated Call Disconnect
Case 4: Base Station Initiated Call Disconnect
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 227 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 3: Mobile Initiated Call Disconnect
Mobile Station
Base station
Detects user initiated Disconnect Reverse Traffic Channel

Sends Release Order
Sends Release Order
Enters System Determination

Substate of the Mobile State
Initialisation State.
Case 4: Base Station Initiated Call Disconnect
Base Station
Mobile station
Detects Call Disconnect

Sends Release Order

ReverseTraffic Channel
Sends Release Order
Enters System Determination
Substate of the Mobile State
Initialisation State.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 228 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Call Processing during Soft Hand Off

_________________________________________________________
Case 5: Call Processing During Soft Hand-off:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 229 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 5: Call Processing During Soft Hand-off

Mobile Station
Base Station
< User Conversation using A>

Pilot B level exceeds T_ADD.
Sends Pilot Strength Measure ment Report .
< User Conversation using A>

Reverse Traffic Channel
A receives Measurement Report.

B starts sending Tfc data on the
Forward Traffic Channel and
acquires the Reverse Traffic chl.
Receives Handoff Direction.

Acquires B: Starts using
Active Set {A,B}.
A and B send Handoff Direction

Message to use A and B
Sends Handoff completion message Reverse Traffic Channel
A and B receive Completion

Message.
Handoff Drop Timer for Pilot A

expires.
Mobile sends measurement report
Receives Handoff Direction
Sends Handoff Completion
Message
< User Conversation using B>
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
A and B receive Measurement

report.
A and B send Handoff Direction
Message to use pilot B only.
A and B receive completion
message.
A stops transmitting on the
Forward channel and receiveing
on the reverse traffic Channel.
< User Conversation using B>
Page 230 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case 6: Call processing during sequential soft hand off

_________________________________________________________
Case 6: Call Processing During Sequential Soft Hand-off :
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 231 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

This is an example of Hand-off when the mobile is talking to two base stations
during a Hand-off process and another hand-off to a third base station C becomes
imminent.
Part -1:
Mobile Station
Base Station
< User Conversation using A and B>

Pilot C level exceeds T_ADD.
Handoff Drop Timer for Pilot A
expires.
Sends Pilot Strength Measure ment Report .
Receives Handoff Direction.

Acquires C: Starts using
Active Set {B,C}.
Message
HandoffDrop Timer of B expires
Mobile sends measurement report
< User Conversation using A and B>
A and Breceive Measurement

Report. decide that the new Active
set should have B and C.
C starts sending Tfc data on the
Forward Traffic Channel and
acquires the Reverse Traffic chl.
A Band C send Handoff
Direction Message to use B and C
A Band C receive Completion
Message.
A stops transmitting on the
Forward channel and receiveing
on the reverse traffic Channel.

B and C receive Measurement
report
continued ....
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 232 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Case6: Call processing during sequential soft hand off

_________________________________________________________
Case 6: Call Processing During Sequential Soft Hand-off : Part 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 233 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

Part -2:
Mobile Station
( continued )
Base Station
( continued )
B and C send Handoff Direction
Message
Receives Handoff Direction

Message
Starts using Active Set c
Message

B and C receive Handoff
Completion Message
B stops using the Forward
and Reverse Traffic channels.
User conversation using C
User conversation using C
continued ....
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 234 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
SECTION 8
Introduction to cdma2000
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 235 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Section 8
Introduction to cdma2000
Objectives
Introduction
Overview of 2G network Architecture
3G Network Architecture
IP Mobility
RAN Mobility
CN Mobility
3G Wireless Systems
cdma2000 standards
cdma2000 Network architecture
cdma2000based 3G network
cdma2000 RAN interfaces
Circuit Switched Data Call
Packet data call
cdma2000 protocol layer
cdma2000 physical layer
Turbo Encoder
cdma2000 forward link
Pilot Channels
Sync Channels
Forward Link Radio Configurations
Reverse link radio configurations
Reverse link channels
Orthogonal Walsh codes
RC Support by Mobile
Packet Switched call setup
Future of CDMA
1X Evolution Alternatives
Migration from 2G to 3G
Migration paths to 3G
1X Network Overview
Radio Access network
Access node
Packet Data network
Network Operations and Maintenance Description
Motorola cdma2000 network migration
388
394
402
408
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
410
413
417
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
235
237
238
240
244
252
254
256
258
266
270
274
276
280
282
284
286
290
302
304
306
318
320
322
324
330
354
356
360
372
374
378
382
Page 236 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Objectives
_________________________________________________________
Objectives
Explain cdma2000 packet data architecture
Learn interfaces/protocols between network nodes
Key components like PDSN, CBSC, 1XBTS
cdma2000 radio interfaces
Motorola migration paths
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 237 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Introduction
_________________________________________________________
Introduction
The 1G systems introduced the cellular concept in which multiple antenna sites
are used to serve an area. The coverage area of a single antenna is called a
cell.1G systems uses analog transmission technologies .So it is best suited for
Voice services, as data communications can be cumbersome.
The 2G technologies begin in the late 1980s and early 1990s.The primary
motivation was increased system capacity. This was achieved by using more
efficient digital-radio technologies that enabled the transmission of digitized
compressed speech signals. This technology supports data services as high as
14.4 Kb/s .2G technologies typically uses circuit switched techniques which is
not very efficient for sending packet data such as that sent on internet. This
inefficiency makes the use of wireless data more expensive for the end user
than it needs to be.
The evolution from 2G to 3G is occurring in early 2000s.The 3G systems
support high speed data services as high as 2Mb/s Data can be transferred
using packet switching techniques rather than circuit switching techniques. So it
is more efficient, less expensive and opens up the possibility of cost-effective
internet access, access to corporate intranets and a host of multimedia
services.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 238 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Evolution of Wireless Technologies
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 239 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 2G network Architecture

_________________________________________________________
2G Network Architecture in IS-95 An Overview
The network architecture is based on IS 41 network protocol. The IS-95 air
interface protocol is used between the MS and base station. The interface
between BSC and BTS is vendor specific. The interface between BSC and
MSC is defined by Inter Operability Specification (IOS) protocol. This is an
optional interface and most vendors have their own proprietary protocols. IOS
also defines support for mobility and soft handoff in an IS-95 based air
interface.
IS-41 protocol is used for communication between most network elements. IS41 also defines the interface between two MSCs to ensure interoperability
between wireless networks from different vendors. IS-41 supports only call
signalling and does not cover network management.
Voice calls are routed through the MSC. For circuit and limited packet data
services, the MSC or BSC connects to an Inter Working Function (IWF)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 240 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
2G Network Architecture in IS-95 An Overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 241 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
2G Limitations
_________________________________________________________
2G Limitations
Bandwidth Limitations
The 2G systems support data rates less than 64kbps.In fact, most systems
support data rates up to 14.4kbps.Most technologies use radio channels that
are designed to support only voice services. The CDMA systems use a 1.25
MHz bandwidth channel and the options provided allow a maximum data rate of
115.2kbps.
Limited Roaming capabilities
Multiple air interface technologies are used in 2G networks and they are not
compatible with each other. Multi-mode mobile stations are rare, and those
available support only two modes. In addition, on the network side, the
underlying incompatibility between IS-41 and GSM MAP prevents roaming
across systems using different network protocols.
Data services
2G services are primarily designed for Voice services. Most systems support
only data rates up to 14.4 kbps. Service such as Internet access, requiring
support of data rates greater than 100kbps are not possible using existing 2G
technologies. The data services supported are primarily circuit oriented.
Packet data Networks
Packet data is typically intermittent and busy in nature .If the circuit switched
approach is used to support packet data services, this would result in inefficient
usage of radio and network resources. Most 2G technologies have no protocol
support for packet data services.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 242 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
2G Limitations
Capacity
Limited Roaming capabilities
Limited support for packet data
No multimedia
Data rate 14.4-64kbps
Uni-service network
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 243 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
_________________________________________________________
Mobile Station (MS)
This is the user terminal .The user terminal provides wireless Network
Access and user applications with appropriate user interface such as voice
application and keys to dial a telephone number, fax, web browser and
other interfaces to connect a laptop computer to allow network access to a
users laptop.
Radio Access Network (RAN)
Provides Radio channels to the mobile station

Radio level mobility: Allow the users to move within RAN during
handoff
Authentication and security over radio channels
Quality of service (QOS) over the radio channels
Power control, radio resource management, network information
broadcasting
Core Network (CN)

The core network is the network of components that provide access to users
over the network as well as network services such as voice mail, web
server, billing There are two types of core networks
Circuit switched core network (CS-CN)
Provides services using circuit switched transport and interconnects with
circuit switched networks such as PSTN
Packet switched Network (PS-CN)
Uses packet switched technologies and interconnects with Internet.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 244 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 245 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Rates
_________________________________________________________
Data Rates Asymmetric in Nature
The underlying protocol for the www is the Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP). When a mobile user wants to retrieve a web page, he sends an HTTP
request. The HTTP request may be of few kilobytes. The HTTP response
carries the web page from server to the user. If the page contains images and
multimedia information, it may span a few megabytes. Thus, there is
asymmetry in the data rate transferred in both directions. If equal bandwidth
channels are allocated in both directions over the air, it leads to enormous
waste and a low spectral efficiency in the reverse link. The 3G radio interfaces
allow for flexible, unequal allocation of bandwidth in different directions. This
leads to higher spectral efficiency, a requirement of International Mobile
Telecommunication (IMT-2000).
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 246 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Rates Asymmetric in nature
Bandwidths requirements in reverse and forward channels are different

which leads to efficient radio spectrum utilization.
Useful for applications like web access and cable TV
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 247 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Bandwidth on Demand
_________________________________________________________
Bandwidth on Demand
Bandwidth on demand (BOD) is required to support intermittent and bursty
behavior of web applications. Depending on the amount of data to be
transmitted, either the user terminal may request bandwidth or network may
allocate bandwidth as required. During periods of no data transmission
dedicated radio traffic channels are not allocated to the user. When there is
data to be transmitted by either user or network, dedicated radio channels
may be assigned to the user.
The 3G technologies generally support BOD by having common control
channels, low rate dedicated channels and variable rate traffic channels.
This is the strategy followed
When there is sufficient information to be exchanged, a dedicated
traffic channel is allocated to the user.
Allocate a low rate dedicated control channel when sufficient data
transmission is likely within a short time period
Deallocate all dedicated channels from the user if there has been no
data exchanged with the user recently.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 248 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Bandwidth on Demand
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 249 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Concurrent Channels
_________________________________________________________
Concurrent Channels
The 3G radio technologies are designed to support varying information
rates. The bandwidth can be allocated on demand and dynamically results
in high-spectral utilization. One of the goals of 3G networks is to provide
multimedia services. In multimedia services, there are several media
streams such as audio, video and text data. Each stream may be carried in
separate concurrent channels that have their own data rates .The 3G radio
interfaces can allocate multiple, concurrent radio channels for multimedia
services .The protocol structure has been enhanced to control multiple
channels together and provide different levels of Quality of Service (QOS)
on different channels.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 250 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Concurrent Channels
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 251 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
IP Mobility
_________________________________________________________
IP Mobility
IP mobility is the ability to move with an IP address after an application is
connected using that IP address. It allows user to be mobile while
connected to the desired IP based services. The 2G networks only
supported mobility for Circuit Switched connections, with the exception of
Cellular Digital Packet Data or CPDP. In the 3G different levels of IP
mobility are supported. For example, the RAN (Radio Access Network)
mobility is supported by handoffs between the cell sites.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 252 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
IP Mobility
Ability to move with an IP address while the connection using the IP

address is active.
IP mobility may be provided by a combination of RAN mobility and CN
mobility.
RAN Mobility- Handoff, Cell selection/reselection.
CN IP Mobility-Mobile IP.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 253 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
RAN Mobility
_________________________________________________________
Mobility in 3G Networks: RAN Mobility
RAN allows user to move around while connected. BSC or Radio Network
Controller (RNC) may allow user to mover within the cells it controls with out
any participation form Packet Data Node (PDN) in the core network. The
RAN provides mobility using handoff, cell selection or cell-reselection
process
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 254 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobility in 3G: RAN Mobility
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 255 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CN Mobility
_________________________________________________________
Mobility in 3G Networks: CN Mobility
RAN allows user to move around while connected. BSC or Radio Network
Controller (RNC) may allow user to mover within the cells it controls with out
any participation form Packet Data Node (PDN) in the core network. The
RAN provides mobility using handoff, cell selection or cell-reselection
process
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 256 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobility in 3G Networks: CN Mobility
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 257 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
3G Wireless Systems
_________________________________________________________
3G Wireless Systems
The International telecommunication Union (ITU) facilitates 3G standards
development .In the early 1990s ITU formed a subgroup called International
Mobile communications-2000 (IMT-2000)
The term Third Generation Mobile systems or 3G is used to define an
umbrella of standards and systems for the next generation of terrestrial and
satellite based mobile systems.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 258 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
3G Wireless System
Third Generation of Wireless systems
Developed under International Telecommunication Union(ITU) and other

regional bodies
Designed to provide:
-
High data rate services
Advanced multimedia services
Global roaming
Other features
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 259 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
3G Wireless Technologies
_________________________________________________________
There are multiple 3G wireless technologies being defined and deployed
around the world today. These technologies are successors to existing 3G
technologies
cdma2000 is the successor to IS-95 systems, cdma2000 defines two
different options for 3G technologies. The option differs in the amount of
spectrum used. The Spreading Rate (SR1) operates in the 1.25 MHz band
and is known as 1x system. The Spreading Rate (SR3) operates in the 3.75
MHz band and is known as 3x system. Two other proposals are also being
considered in cdma2000 referred to as 1XEVDO and 1XEVDV. 1XEVDO is
a data only solution that enables a bandwidth of 2Mbps without any
mechanism for voice. 1XEDV is another standard for a technology that will
allow both voice and data applications
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 260 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 261 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
What is cdma2000
_________________________________________________________
What is cdma2000
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 262 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
What is cdma2000
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 263 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Key features
_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Key Features
It is designed to meet requirements for the next generation evolution of the
current IS-95 family of standards and includes various features and
enhancements
Support for overlay configurations within the same physical channel
as existing IS-95 systems
Supports wide range of data rates Indoor Office (2Mbps), Indoor to
Outdoor/Pedestrian (384 kbps), and Vehicular (144 kbps)
Various techniques to improve the system capacity for voice calls
e.g. transmit diversity, fast forward power control, reverse pilot
channel, new coding schemes etc
Improvements in System Access that reduces collision and supports
sending short data bursts on a common channel
Quick Paging Channel is introduced to enhance paging strategy to
improve standby battery life of mobile station
An advanced multimedia Quality of Service (QoS) control capability
supporting multiple concurrent voice, high-speed packet data and
high speed circuit data services along with sophisticated QoS
management capabilities
Support for Removable User Identity Module (R-UIM) for global
roaming
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 264 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Key Features of cdma2000

Supports Packet Data and Higher data rates (614.4 Kbps & 2 Mbps)
Increased System Capacity (>50%)

Improved System Access
Improved Paging Mechanism
Other Features
Multimedia Services
Quality of Service (QoS)
Support for R-UIM
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 265 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 standards
_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Standards evolution
The first version of the IS-95 standard was released in 1994, followed by IS95A in the beginning of 1995, and J-STD-008 and IS-95B in 1997. The
deployment of the wireless system that complies with one of these
standards is also known as cdmaOne
In 1998, TR45.5 subcommittee of TR45 of TIA (Telecommunication Industry
Association North American Telecommunications Standards Organization)
proposed an air interface solution that would meet IMT-2000 requirements
and also backward compatible with IS-95. 1x solution would achieve some
of the data rates required by IMT-2000, but 3x solution was required to meet
highest data rate of 2Mbps
The initial version of IS-2000 was released in 1999 and IS-2000A was
published in April 2000. Currently, IS-2000B is in development. Also in
2000, a separate standard IS-856 was published to support high-speed
packet data services up to 2 Mbps. This standard was pioneered by
Qualcomm and is also known as High Data Rate (HDR) or 1x Evolution for
Data only (1xEV-DO). At present, the development of 1x Evolution for Data
and Voice (1xEV-DV) standard is underway in the global standards body
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 266 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Cdma2000 Standards Evolution
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 267 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Nomenclature
_________________________________________________________
Nomenclature
The IS-95A was specified in North America for 800Mhz frequency band. A
version to support 1900 MHz PCS band was later published as J-STD-008.
Both of these collection of standards collectively called as IS-95. Later, the
CDMA Development Group (CDG) gave a trade name to these wireless
systems as cdmaOne
IS-2000 family of standards started in 1988 and two versions of this
standard have been published, namely, IS-2000 and IS-2000A. CDG
adopted trade name for this family of standards as cdma2000
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 268 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Nomenclature
Trade Name
Commonly Used
Name
Family of Standards
cdmaOne
IS-95
IS-95A, ANSI JSTD-008, IS-95B
cdma2000
cdma2000
IS-2000, IS-2000A
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 269 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Network Architecture

_________________________________________________________
IMT-2000 group is formed in mid 1990s to specify requirements for 3G
wireless system. These systems contains three high level components: The
Radio Access Network (RAN), The Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN),
and the Packet-Switched Core Network (PS-CN). The BSC and the BTS
provide the RAN function, MSC/VLR and HLR/AC provide the CS-CN
function, PDSN (Packet Data Serving Node) provides primary element of
PS-CN. PS-CN provides connectivity to Internet, and leverages standard
Internet protocols. It provides interface to RAN through the Radio-Packet
(R-P) interface. It routes packets from the Internet to the RAN and vice
versa. The PS-CN uses the Mobile IP protocol to provide mobility for packet
data services. Mobile IP entities such as Home Agent (HA) and the Foreign
Agent (FA) are also included in the PS-CN. The AAA server provides
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting functions of the PS-CN
Standards for cdma2000 Networks
The IS-2000 defines the over-the-air interface standard and is the successor
for the IS-95 standard
The Network standards for cdma2000 include Inter Operability Specification
(IOS) and IS-41. IOS defines the interface between the RAN and core
networks, including the A interface between BSC and MSC and the R-P
interface between BSC and PDSN
IS 41 defines the interface between different core network components
including MSC, HLR, VLR and AC. IS-41 is used only in CS-CN. In addition
cdma2000 leverage Internet standards like RADIUS, Mobile IP and IPSec
for packet data operation
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 270 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 271 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
New Network Functions

_________________________________________________________
Packet Control Function (PCF)
It is responsible for establishing, maintaining and releasing the interface
between the RAN and PS-CN for each packet session in progress
Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN)
It is the PS-CN element that interfaces with RAN. It provides routing
information, routing data packets between RAN and Packet Data Network like
Internet. It is similar to MSC, and also provides support for Authentication,
Authorization and Accounting, which it does by interfacing with a separate AAA
function
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) function
It keeps user profile information (from a packet data perspective), and keeps
records of regarding the data usage of each user
The data mobility between different PS-CNs, cdma2000 uses Mobile IP defined
by Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). Mobile IP adds two entities, the
Home Agent (HA) and Foreign Agent (FA). The HA is located in users home
network, and anchors the users IP address. When the user roams into a visited
network and interacts with the Packet Data Network, the Foreign Agent of the
Visited network interacts with the users Home Agent to support packet data
operation.
AAA function and supported protocols and Mobile IP solution were defined by
IETF
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 272 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PCF (Packet Control Function)
Establishes and maintains interface between RAN and PS-CN

Might be implemented in BSC
AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting)
Handles key auxiliary functions for packet data operation
Authentication of profile information
Authorization of data services
Collects billing information from PDSN
PDSN (Packet Data Serving Node)
Bridges the RAN and Public Packet Data Network
Packet Accounting
Mobile IP Foreign Agent
PPP Terminator
Home Agent
Function in users visited service area which supports Mobile IP
Often implemented on PDSN
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 273 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma based 3G network

_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Based 3G Network
The network architecture for cdma2000 based wireless system still relies on
the IS-41 network protocol. The IS-95 air interface has been enhanced to
IS-2000 to support 3G service requirements set by ITU. IOS protocol has
been enhanced as well and it also defines a new interface Radio-Packet (RP) to support true packet data services. The BSC connects to the Packet
Data Serving Node (PDSN) via the R-P interface and the PDSN connects to
the Internet using Internet Protocols defined by IETF. Additional network
elements can be added to support new services like location-based
services.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 274 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Based 3G Network
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 275 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma-RAN interfaces
_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Radio Network Interfaces
IS-2000 air interface protocol (Mobile Station and Base Station)
IS 2001 (Inter Operability Specification IOS)
A1: Signaling Interface (BS and MSC)
A2, 5: Traffic Interface for voice and circuit data services (BS and MSC)
A3, A7: Traffic and Signaling Interfaces to support inter-system soft handoff
(Source BS and Target BS)
A8, A9: Traffic and Signaling Interfaces to support packet data services
(BS and PCF). Note: While this interface has been defined, the extent to
which it will be implemented remains in question.
A10, A11: Traffic and Signaling Interfaces to support packet data services
(BS/PCF and PDSN)
The PDSN provides the interface to IP networks and leverages many
Internet Standards such as RADIUS, Mobile IP and IPSec. The internet
standards are used only for packet data services
IS-41 defines the interface between different Core Network Components.
The Components include MSC, HLR, VLR and AC. IS-41 is used only in
Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 276 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Radio Network Interfaces
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 277 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Network Standards

_________________________________________________________
MS to Base Station (BTS/BSC)
cdma2000 Air Interface as defined in IS-2000
MS to Base Station
Radio Link Protocol (RLP) to provide reliable link for packet data services overthe-air medium, as defined in IS-707
MS to Packet Data Serving Node
Point-to-Point (PPP) link between the MS (or PC) and the Packet Data Serving
Node (PDSN), as defined in RFC-1661
MS to MSC and BS to Packet Data Serving Node
Inter Operability Specification (IOS), as defined in IS-2001
MS to Other wireless network entities
As defined in IS-41
Packet Data Serving Node to Internet
Set of specifications as defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
Packet Data Serving Nod to Authentication Authorization and Accounting
(AAA)
Remote access dial-in user service (RADIUS) protocol as defined in RFC 2338
and 2339
PC/MS to Packet Data Serving Node to Home Agent
Mobile IP protocol as defined in RFC2002
PC/MS to Application Services
Any of the Internet related protocols such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP),
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP),
Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) and so forth
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 278 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 279 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The circuit switched architecture in cdma2000 is the same as IS-95B. The
same components and architecture are used to support circuit switched
data calls. The MSC provides connectivity to circuit switched networks such
as PSTN network. The circuit data path runs from the MS to BTS and then
to BSC at 9.6 or 14.4 kbps. The Inter Working Function (IWF) is co-located
either at BSC or at the MSC. In this example, the IWF is co-located at the
MSC. The BSC is responsible for transcoding to 64kbps PCM format. The
MSC sends the user traffic to IWF and IWF allocates a modem (just like a
modem of a dial-up connection from home) for this call, From this point
forward, the circuit data call is similar to a dial-up connection to the
Internet
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 280 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 281 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Data Call

_________________________________________________________
Packet Data Call
The cdma2000 networks support two IP addressing options for packet data:
1.Simple IP: Used when no mobility is required. When the MS moves
from one PDSN (packet zone) to another PDSN (packet zone), the
existing service/application connections are lost and the user has to
reestablish those connections. For example, if the user is in the middle
of downloading a web page, the user has to download the entire web
page again.
2.Mobile IP: The mobile IP option is used when mobility beyond a packet
zone is required. The MS may move from one PDSN (packet zone) to
another PDSN (packet zone) without establishing a new
service/application connection. The Mobile IP standards form IETF are
used to provide packet data mobility
The cdma2000 supports high-data rate traffic channels for packet data
services. The Supplemental Channels (SCHs) introduced in cdma2000
provide a bandwidth of 307.2 kbps per channel for 1xRTT. In addition to
high data rate channels, cdma2000 supports an enhanced radio state model
for true packet data solutions. A new packet interface is defined between
the BSC and PDSN for packet data services. The interface is known as
Radio-Packet (R-P) interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 282 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Data Call
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 283 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 protocol layer

_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Protocol Layer
IS-95 standard does not identify or specify each protocol layer separately.
IS-95 covers the complete air interface specification that includes aspects of
the physical layer, Medium Access Control (MAC) sublayer, Link Access
Control (LAC) sublayer and upper layer.
IS-2000 standard is defined as follows:
IS-2000.1: Introduction
IS-2000.2: Physical Layer
IS-2000.3: Medium Access Layer
IS-2000.4: Link Access Control
IS-2000.5: Upper Layer Signalling
IS-2000.6: Analog Signalling
The service related to voice, circuit data and packet data are specified in
separate standards. IS-707 defines service options related to data services
and defines the Radio Link Protocol (RLP); a different standard, IS-127,
defines Service Option 3 for Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) voice
service
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 284 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Protocol Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 285 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Cdma2000 physical layer

_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Physical Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 286 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Physical layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 287 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Protection
_________________________________________________________
Data Protection
Since the wireless medium is inherently unreliable, various methods are
used to protect and transfer the data
.
Convolutional Encoding
Encoding increases reliability of information bits and reduces the power
required for transmission. Encoded bits are called symbols. Convolutional
encoders are characterized by two parameters: the constraint length (k) and
the rate ( R), The constraint length refers to the number of bits used to
calculate the output symbols; k=9 is used for both IS-95 and cdma2000
systems. The rate is fraction that can be seen as 1/(number of output symbols
per input bit). For example, an encoder of rate outputs two symbols for each
input bit.
Symbol Repetition
The symbols out of encoder may be repeated to achieve a particular
intermediate symbol rate. For example, an encoded data rate of 4800 symbols
per second might be repeated four times t achieve an effective data rate of 19.2
kbps. Each symbol could then be spread by a code consisting of 64 bits to
obtain the transmission rate of 1.2288X106 chips per second. Repetition
increases redundancy in the data stream
Block Interleaving
The repeated symbols are interleaved so adjacent symbols are not transmitted
next to each other. This prevents adjacent data symbols from getting lost due
to deep fading. It will not change effective data rate
Turbo Encoding
A turbo encoder employs two conventional encoders to increase the error
correction capability, but cause some processing delays. It is added in
cdma2000 to support error correction requirements for data
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 288 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Protection
IS-95
Convolutional Encoding
Repetition
Interleaving
IS-2000
New: Turbo Encoding
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 289 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Turbo Encoder
_________________________________________________________
Turbo Encoder
It is a new class of error correction codes used in digital communication
systems. It is used to perform better for high data services with stringent
error rate requirements of the order of 10-6 Bit Error Rates(BER). Turbo
codes perform within 1db of Shannons limit when compared to
convolutional code which perform at least 2.5 t 3.0 db short. Turbo encoder
consists of two constituent convolutional encoders. Each encoder uses a 3bit shift register with a constraint length of k=4 and encoding rate R=1/2.
Both constituent encoders use the code the same data. The first encoder is
fed data in the same order as input data. The second encoder uses a
permuted form of the input data and the permuting is accomplished by the
use of an interleaver.
The input data bit forms the first output bit
Each convolutional encoder outputs 2 bits for each input bit. The
first constituent encoder outputs a1 and b1 symbols while the second
encoder outputs a2 and b2 symbol. The cdma2000 uses different
encoding rates. The defined rates are R=1/2,1/3 or 1/4
.
R=1/2: All bits are transmitted, the first coded bits from each
constituent encoder (a1 and a2) are alternately punctured to
achieve the desired rate
R=1/3: All data bits are transmitted and the first encoder
output bits (a1 and a2) are also transmitted to achieve the
output rate of 1/3
Rate=1/4: in this case the data bit and the first output bits of
constituent encoders (a1 and a2) are always transmitted. The
second output bits of constituent encoders (b1 and b2) are
alternately to achieve the desired 1/4 rate.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 290 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Turbo Encoder
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 291 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Channel Separation
_________________________________________________________
Channel Separation
IS-95B uses fixed 64 bit Walsh codes for channel separation and
spreading in the forward link only. In IS-2000, variable length Walsh codes
are used for spreading and channel separation in both directions
Walsh codes are a special set of orthogonal codes. Two codes are said to
be orthogonal to each other if the exclusive-OR operation of the two results
is an equal number of zeros and ones, I.e. cross-correlation between the
two codes is equal t zero. When correlation is zero, it implies that two codes
are
half
similar
and
half
dissimilar
to
each
other.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 292 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Channel Separation
Orthogonal Codes
Two orthogonal codes are always half similar and half

dissimilar
Inverse of an orthogonal code maintains orthogonality with
other codes in the set
IS-95B uses 64-bit Walsh codes for channel separation in the forward
link
IS-2000 uses variable length Walsh codes for Channel separation in
both directions
IS-2000 supports various data rates by using appropriate length
Walsh codes for spreading
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 293 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Codes in cdma2000

_________________________________________________________
Walsh Codes in cdma2000
Walsh codes are used in both forward and reverse directions to establish
orthogonality
cdma2000 use use reverse pilots in Reverse Link instead of Walsh
modulators like in IS-95. Reverse pilots provides coherent reverse link
detection
In 95A and 95B, Walsh codes are used to establish orthogonality
between channels on the forward direction only
On the reverse link in 95A and in 95B, 64-ary Walsh modulator is
used to isolate Data blocks
cdma2000 supplemental channel is capable of carrying 1,036,800 bps on a
single RF carrier. With the code chip rate fixed at 1228800 chips/sec, the
length of the Walsh code spreading will be reduced considerably
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 294 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh codes in cdma2000
Walsh codes are used in both forward and reverse directions to establish
orthogonality
cdma2000 use use reverse pilots in Reverse Link instead of Walsh modulators
like in IS-95. Reverse pilots provides coherent reverse link detection
In 95A and 95B, Walsh codes are used to establish orthogonality
between channels on the forward direction only
On the reverse link in 95A and in 95B, 64-ary Walsh modulator is
used to isolate Data blocks
cdma2000 supplemental channel is capable of carrying 1,036,800 bps on a

single RF carrier. With the code chip rate fixed at 1228800 chips/sec, the length
of the Walsh code spreading will be reduced considerably
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 295 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Covers
_________________________________________________________
Walsh Covers (Reverse Link)
In the forward direction, cdma2000 uses Walsh codes to distinguish
different streams of data. In the reverse direction, cdma2000 uses Walsh
covers to distinguish different streams of data from the same mobile station.
The base station does not assign Walsh covers; rather, they are predefined
in the standard for each type of channel the mobile may want to transmit.
Since the signal sent by the mobile also contains the source identification
unique to each mobile, there is no conflict caused by two mobile station
using the same Walsh cover at the same time. Conceptually, the base
station simultaneously receiving the signal for multiple mobile stations can
first use the source identification to extract the signal coming from one
mobile station, and can then further extract one particular channel using the
appropriate Walsh cover.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 296 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Walsh Covers
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 297 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PN Codes
_________________________________________________________
PN Codes
Two PN codes are used in CDMA. The short PN code is used to identify
each base station and the long PN code is used to uniquely identify each
mobile
Short Codes
PN code are generated using shift register of length 15. The length of
sequence is 215 1 = 32,767 bits.
Generated at the rate of 1.2288 MHz
These codes repeat after every 26.67ms
Short codes are used for quadrature spreading in both directions
Each BS generates the same short code with a different offset that
uniquely identify the base station
Long Codes:
PN long code
It is generated with a register length of 42. The length of the sequence is 242-1
bits
Generated at the rate of 1.2288 MHz
This code repeats in approximately 41 days
The long code is used for spreading in the reverse direction (MS and BS)
Each MS identify itself by altering the long code with a long code mask that
is unique for each MS
.
Long code masks are also used in some cases fro channel separation in
the reverse direction
In the forward direction, the long code is used for scrambling
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 298 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PN Codes
Short PN Codes
Generated using a 15-shift register
Two short sequences I & Q

Used as pilot reference signal
Each BS assigned a unique offset of the short PN sequence
Long PN Codes
Generated using a 42 bit shift register
Used for user separation in the reverse link

Long code generated using permuted ESN as the PN mask
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 299 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Modulation
_________________________________________________________
Modulation
The cdma2000 uses Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) to transmit
data over the air in the forward direction. In QPSK, the data stream to be
transmitted is divided into two streams, called the Inphase (I) and
Quadrature (Q) streams. After some processing (depicted by dotted lines),
the inphase stream is multiplied by a cosine wave at the carrier frequency
(for example 1900MHz); the quadrature stream is multiplied by a sine wave
at the same frequency. The resulting signals are combined before being
transmitted.
Since cos() and sin() are orthogonal functions, they can be separated at the
receiver. This property allows different data to be sent simultaneously on
each stream. The cdma2000 exploits this in the forward direction by
allowing the data to be demultiplexed into I & Q streams, so twice as much
data can be sent. In the reverse direction, different physical channels are
sent on different streams. Several channels can be sent on the same
stream, since they can be separated within a stream using the orthogonal
Walsh covers.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 300 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Modulation
Cdma2000 sends information in Quadrature streams
I&Q streams can be separated at receive

r
Forward: I&Q streams can each carry one-half the data, resulting in
increased Walsh code resources
Reverse: I&Q streams can each carry different channels
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 301 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 Forward link

_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Forward Link
The cdma2000 standard prescribes a set of Forward Link Channel options
depending on Radio configuration scenarios. To reduce intra-cell
interference, each forward link physical channel is modulated by an
appropriate Walsh code or quasi-orthogonal function. Each code channel is
then spread by a quadrature pair of PN sequences at a fixed chip rate of
1.2288 Mcps. Multiple Forward CDMA channels may be used within a base
station in a frequency multiplexed manner. The forward link in cdma2000
essentially consists of two groups of physical channels: The common
Forward Channels and the Dedicated Forward Channels
The Forward Pilot Channel, Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel, Auxiliary Pilot
Channels, and Auxiliary Transmit Diversity Pilot Channels are unmodulated
spread spectrum signals used for synchronization by a mobile station
operating within the coverage area of the base station.
The Forward Pilot channel is transmitted at all times by the base station on
each active Forward CDMA channel (cell or sectors short PN offset), unless
the base station is classified as a hopping pilot beacon.
If the Forward Pilot Channel is transmitted by hopping pilot beacon, then
suitable timing requirements shall apply:
Hopping pilot beacons change frequency periodically to simulate multiple
pilot beacons transmitting pilot information
This results in discontinuous transmissions on a given Forward CDMA
channel
If the transmit diversity is used on a Forward CDMA channel, then the base
station shall transmit a Transmit Diversity Pilot
When the Transmit diversity pilot channel is transmitted, the base station
should continue to use sufficient power on the Forward Pilot Channel to
ensure that a mobile station is able to acquire and estimate the Forward
CDMA channel without using energy from the Transmit Diversity Pilot
Channel
Zero or more Auxiliary Pilot Channels are transmitted by the base station on
an active Forward CDMA Channel
If Orthogonal Transmit Diversity (OTD) is used on the Forward CDMA
channel associated with an Auxiliary Pilot Channel, then the base station
shall transmit an Auxiliary Diversity Pilot
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 302 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward link in cdma2000
The
forward common channels are

The Pilot
Common Pilot (F-CPICH)
Common Diversity Pilot (F-CDPICH
Auxiliary Pilot (F-APICH)
Auxiliary Diversity Pilot (F-ADPICH)
Dedicated Auxiliary Pilot (F-ADPICH)
dedicated)
(Could be considered
The Sync Channel

The Quick Paging Channel
The Common Control Channe
The Broadcast Channel
The Common Assignment Channe
l
The Common Power Control Channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 303 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Channels
_________________________________________________________
Pilot Channels
The Pilot channels are always on Walsh Code Channel Zero and must be
present in every station or sector. Pilot channels carry no information.
Essentially, they consists of Short PN chips: They serve as:
Beacon signals to facilitate rapid pilot searches by the mobiles
Demodulate reference for the Mobile Station receiver
Reference signal to define the cell boundary
Reference signal to perform handoff measurements
The shot PN code pair (PNI and PNQ) is generated by a modified
linear feedback shift register. The resulting sequences have a Length
of 215 or 32,768 chips. At 1.2288 Mcps, this means a period of
26.667ms
All Base Stations and Sectors use the same short code, and thus
have similar pilot waveforms. They are distinguished from one
another only by the phase (Short PN code Offset) of the pilot. The air
interfaces stipulate that pilot phases be nominally assigned to
stations in multiples of 64 chips, giving a total of 215-6=512 possible
assignments. The 9-bit number that identifies the pilot phase
assignment is called the Pilot Offset.
In cdma2000, five pilot channels are used. These are unmodulated spread
spectrum signals and are used by MS for synchronization operating within
the coverage area of a base station
Forward Pilot Channel (F-PICH) is transmitted at all times by the
base station on each active forward CDMA channel. It is covered by
W064. It is similar to the pilot channel in IS-95A/B. It provides a
coherent reference for easy acquisition to all mobiles in the forward
link. It is used to measure the forward link and establish the cell
boundaryTransmit Diversity Pilot Channel (F-TDPICH) covered by
W16128Auxiliary Pilot Channel is transmitted in beam forming
application. It is covered by WnN, where N < 512 and 1<n <N-1
(Walsh code number n and Walsh code Length N are specified by
the base station).
The Auxiliary Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel are transmitted when
transmit diversity is used. It is covered by
An optional Auxiliary Dedicated Pilot Channel is also available It
support a variety of beam forming applications and can significantly
increase the capacity of the sector. It can be used with antenna
beam-forming and beam steering techniques to increase the
coverage or data rate towards a particular mobile station.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 304 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Pilot Channels
The pilot channels are always on Walsh code channel zero and must be
present in every station or sector

Short PN code pair is generated by a modified linear feedback shift register
All Base stations and sectors use the same short code and have similar
pilot waveforms
Forward Pilot Channels
In cdma2000, five pilot channels are used. These are unmodulated spread
spectrum signals and are used by MS for synchronization operating within
the coverage area of a base station
Forward Pilot Channel (F-PICH) is transmitted at all times by the base
station on each active forward CDMA channel. It is covered by W064
Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel (F-TDPICH) covered by W16128Auxiliary
Pilot Channel is transmitted in beam forming application. It is covered by
WnN, where N < 512 and 1<n <N-1 (Walsh code number n and Walsh
code Length N are specified by the base station)
The Auxiliary Transmit Diversity Pilot Channel are transmitted when
transmit diversity is used. It is covered by
An optional Auxiliary Dedicated Pilot Channel is also available
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 305 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Sync Channels
_________________________________________________________
Sync Channels
The sync channel (F-SYNCH) is used by mobile stations operating within
the coverage area of the Base station to acquire CDMA system time and
Long PN code synchronization
For an omnicell coverage, there is only one Sync channel per cell. For
sectored cells, there is one Sync channel per sector. For each cell or sector,
the Sync Channel is a low powered, low rate (1200 bps) channel which
contains a single, repeating message referred to as Sync Channel
Message. This message is continuously broadcast by the cell or sector and
contains parameters such as:
The system Identification Number
The network identification number
The cell or sectors short PN offset
The System time
The long code state
The paging channel data rate
The sync channel is covered by Walsh 32 of length 64 similar to IS-95A/B
The bit rate for the Sync Channel is 1200bps. A sync channel frame
is 26.666 ms in duration. For a given base station, the I and Q

channel Pilot PN sequences for the Sync Channel use the same pilot
PN sequence offset as for the Forward Pilot channel
Once the mobile station achieves pilot PN sequence synchronization
by acquiring the Forward pilot channel, the synchronization for the
sync channel is immediately known. This is because the sync
channel (and all other channels) is spread with the same pilot PN
sequence, and because the frame and interleaver timing on the Sync
channel are aligned with the pilot PN sequence
The start of the interleaver block and the frame of the Sync channel
shall align with the start of the pilot PN sequence being used to
spread the Forward CDMA channel
For SR=1, the code speed remains at 1228800 chips/sec, frames
are defined as one cycle of the short PN code, such that the Sync
Frame is exactly 80/3 = 26.667 ms, equal to the period of the short
code. This simplifies finding frame boundaries, once the mobile has
located the pilot. Here three frames make up an 80ms superframe
The structure of the sync channel is the same as IS-95A/B
implementation. Walsh code 32, of length 64 chips, is assigned to the
Sync Channel for operation under Spreading Rate=1.
The Sync Channel (F-SYNCH) is used by mobile stations operating within
the coverage area of the Base Station to acquire CDMA system time and
Long PN code synchronization
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 306 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Sync Channel is covered by Walsh 32 of Length 64 similar to IS-95A/B
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 307 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Idle State Common Channels

_________________________________________________________
Idle State Common Channels
The paging channel is divided into 80ms slots called paging channel
slots
Paging and control messages for a mobile station operating in the
non-slotted mode can be received in any of the Paging Channel
Slots;
Therefore, the non-slotted mode of operation requires the mobile
station to monitor all slots
The Forward Common Control Channel is divided into 80ms slots
called Forward Common Control Channel slots
Paging and mobile directed messages for a mobile station operating
in the non-slotted mode can be received in any of the Forward
Common Control Channel slots
The overhead messages can be received on the Broadcast Control
Channel
Therefore, the non-slotted mode of operation requires the mobile
station to continuously monitor the Forward Common Control
channel/Broadcast Control Channel
The Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH) is used by the base station to
inform the mobile stations, operating in the slotted mode while in the
idle state, whether or not to receive the Forward Common Control
Channel, the Broadcast Channel, or the Paging Channel
The Paging Channel (F-PCH) is used by the base station to transmit
system overhead information and mobile station specific messages.
Since it provides backward compatibility, it is identical to the Paging
channel used in IS-95A/B
The Common control channel is a common channel used for
communication of layer3 and MAC messages from the base station
to the mobile station. The coding parameters are identical to those of
the F-PCH. It is essentially replaces the Paging Channel for Higher
Data Rates configurations (N=6,9,12)
The broadcast channel (F-BCH) is used by the base station to
transmit system overhead information. (note that mobile specific or
directed messages are not sent on this channel since it is a
broadcast channel).
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 308 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Idle State Idle Channels
There are four Forward Common Channels that can be monitored by a MS

while in Idle State:
Quick Paging Channel (F-QPCH)
Paging Channel (F-PCH)
Common Control Channel
Broadcast Channel (F-BCH)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 309 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Common Control Channels

_________________________________________________________
The Forward Common Control Channel is an encoded, interleaved, spread,
and modulated spread spectrum signal that is used by mobile stations

operating within the coverage area of the base station. The base station
uses the F-CCCH to transmit mobile station specific messages
The F-CCCH is essentially an Optimized Paging Channel for high data rate
applications, so at higher spreading rates (N>3) the use of the paging
channel is discontinued. The common control channel is used instead
If a Spreading Rate 1, rate coded Forward Common Control Channel is
present, it shall be assigned to a code channel WnN, where N=32,64 and
128 for the data rates of 38400 bps, 19200 bps, and 9600 bps, respectively,
and
1 < n < N-1. The value of n is specified by the base station
If a Spreading Rate 1, rate coded Forward Common control channel is
present, it shall be assigned to a code channel WnN, where N=16, 32 and
64 for the data rate 1 < n < N-1. The value of n is specified by the base
station.
The F-CCCH shall be divided into Forward Common Control Channel slots
that are each 80ms in duration. These slots shall accommodate frames that
are 20,10 or 5 ms in duration
Although the data rate of the Forward Common Control channel is variable
from frame to frame, the data rate transmitted to a mobile station in a given
frame is predetermined and known to that mobile station
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 310 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

It essentially replaces the Paging channel for higher data rates configuration
(N=6,9,12). The forward common control channel is a common channel
used for communication of layer 3 and MAC messages from the base
station to the mobile station. The coding parameters are identical to those of
the F-PCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 311 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Dedicated Channels

_________________________________________________________
A key limitation of IS-95A is that only one forward channel gets monitored
by a mobile station at given time. Conversely, transmission made on only
one reverse channel at time. In IS-95B, the use of supplemental channels
running in parallel with fundamental channels meant that the mobile station
is able to simultaneously transmit more than one channel.
In cdma2000, transmission and by are monitoring of multiple forward
channels is routine:
Both fundamental and supplemental traffic channels are received in
parallel
Like wise, the MS has to monitor the quick paging channel on an on
going basis, while also reading either the paging channel or forward
common control channel for example.
So, cdma2000 provides two types of forward links physical data channels
fundamental & supplemental that can each be adapted to a particular type
of service. The use of fundamental & supplemental channels enables the
system to be optimized for multiple simultaneous services. The two physical
channels are separately coded and interleaved and in general have different
transmit power levels and frame error rate set points. Each channel carries
a different type of service depending on the service scenarios. This ability to
transmit and receive parallel and independent data streams allows
cdma2000 to achieve higher data rates. CDMA has the ability to exceed
2Mbps while retaining backward compatibility with the earlier standards.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 312 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The specified forward traffic channel are:
Forward Dedicated Control Channel (F-DCCH)

Forward Fundamental Channel (F-FCH)
Forward Supplemental Channel (F-SCH)
Forward Supplemental Code Channel (F-SCCH)
Signals transmitted on forward traffic channels are specified by radio
configurations (RCs)
There are five radio configurations for the forward traffic channel
A base station shall support operation in Radio Configuration 1 or 3. A base
station may support operation in Radio Configurations 2,4 or 5
A base station shall not use Radio Configuration 1 or 2 simultaneously with
Radio Configuration 3,4 or 5 on a Forward Traffic Channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 313 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Fundamental Channels

_________________________________________________________
Forward Fundamental Channels
The forward fundamental channel is used for the transmission of user and
signalling information to a specific mobile station during a call. Each

Forward Traffic Channel may contain one Forward Fundamental Channel
As in IS-95B, this channel is transmitted at variable rate (on a frame by
frame basis) and consequently requires rate detection at the receiver. The
F-FCHs use frame sizes of both 20ms and 5 ms depending on the required
transmission objectives.
Voice must be transmitted using 20ms frames. A shorter frame would
reduce one component of the total voice delay, but degrade the
demodulation performance due to the shorter interleaving span
20ms frames are also the primary conveyors of data services just as they
have been in IS-95A/B. In some cases, 20ms frames are also used for
control
5 ms frames are used on the Forward and Reverse Fundamental
Channels, but never on Supplemental channels
Each F-FCH is transmitted on a different orthogonal, variable length Walsh
code channel:
Each F-FCH and F-SCCH channel with RC1 or 2 shall be assigned to a
code channel Wn64, where 1
n 63
Likewise, each F-FCH and F-DCCHI with Radio Configuration 3 or 5 shall
be assigned to a code channel Wn64, where 1 n
63
Each Forward Fundamental Channel and Forward Dedicated Control
Channel with RC4 shall be assigned to a code channel Wn128, where 1 n
127. The value of n is specified by the base station
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 314 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Fundamental Channel

Forward Fundamental Channel is used for the transmission of user and
signalling information to a specific mobile station during a call. Each

Forward Traffic Channel may contain one Forward Fundamental Channel
This channel (like in 95B) is transmitted at variable rate (on a frame-byframe basis) and consequently requires rate detection at the receiver
Each F-FCH is transmitted on a different orthogonal, variable length Walsh
code channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 315 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Supplemental Channels

_________________________________________________________
Forward Supplemental Channels
Forward Supplemental Code Channels apply only to Radio Configurations 1
and 2 and provide backward compatibility with IS-95B. These channels are
used to transmit users data from the base station to a mobile station during
a call. When operating with Radio Configuration 1 (RC1), the Base station
transmits on the Forward Supplemental Code channel using Rate Set 1
variable data rates on a frame-by-frame basis as follows:
1200-2400-4800- and 9600 bps for RC1 (20ms frames only)
This is identical to the Rate Set 1 Reverse Traffic channel in IS95A/B
When operating with Radio Configuration2, the Base Station
transmits on the Forward Supplemental Code Channel using Rate
Set2 variable data rates on a frame-by-frame basis as follows:
1800-3600-7200-and 14400 bps for RC2 (20ms frames only)
This is identical with Rate Set 2 Reverse Traffic channel in IS-95A/B
The forward traffic channel can simultaneously use (aggregate) up to
seven supplemental code channels in order to enable higher data
speeds on carriers under Rate Configurations 1 and 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 316 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Supplemental Channel

The forward Supplemental Code Channels (F-SCCH) provide backward
compatibility with IS-95A/B. They are defined for Radio Configurations 1 and
2 only. These channels are identical to the F-FCH operating with RC1 and
RC2 (same as IS-95A/B traffic channel for Rate Set 1 and Rate Set2
respectively)
These channels are used to transmit users data from the base station to a
mobile station during a call
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 317 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Link Radio Configurations

_________________________________________________________
Forward link Radio Configurations
In the forward link IS-2000 defines nine different radio configurations: two
based on IS-95B compatibility, three related to Spreading Rate 1, and four
for Spreading Rate 3.
RC1: It supports IS-95B backward compatibility for all services
based on Rate Set 1 (RS1), a 9600 bps base data rate
RC2: It supports IS-95B backward compatibility for all services
based on Rate Set 2 (RS2), a 14400 bps base data rate
RC3: It supports RS1-based data rates with encoding rate for
Spreading Rate1 (or 1XRTT). The range of data rates supported by
this configuration is from 1500 bps to 153600 bps. Orthogonal
Transmit Diversity (OTD) is supported by RC3
RC4: It supports data rates based on 9600 bps base rate and
supports OTD for Spreading Rate 1 (1x). The data rates supported
range from 1500 to 307200 bps
RC5: It supports data rates based on a 14400 bps base rate (RS2based). An encoding rate of is used and RC5 supports data rates
from 1800 bps to 230400 bps for Spreading Rate 1 (1X). OTD is
supported by RC5
RC6: It is for Spreading Rate 3 (3x) and it supports data rates in the
range of 1500 bps to 307200 bps, based on a 9600 bps base rate.
The encoding rate used is 1/6 for RC6. RC6 supports OTD and the
multi-carrier deployment method
RC7: Another 3x configuration, supporting data rates from 1500 bps
to 614400 bps, and like RC6, is based on a 9600 bps base rate
RC8: A 3x configuration based on RS2, with a data rate range from
1800 bps to 460.8 bps
RC9: The 3X configuration proving the highest possible rates, with a
range from 1800 to 1036800 bps
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 318 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward link Radio Configurations
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 319 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Radio Configurations

_________________________________________________________
Reverse link Radio Configurations
The IS-2000 physical layer standards define six different Radio
Configurations (RC). These Configurations have been defined to take care
of the following aspects:
Maintaining compatibility and support for the IS-95B mobile stations
and services
Adding support for services and functions using cdma2000 radio
transmission technology options to increase spectral efficiency and
capacity 1.25MHz channels based on Spreading Rate 1 (popularly
referred to as the 1X option)
Defining and supporting use of wider-channel bandwidths (5 MHz)
and allowing growth of higher-data rate support and related services
This option supports the Spreading Rate 3 (also known as 3X)
In addition to these reasons, to support data rates for services
based on the two currently defined and supported basic rates, each
RC is defined to use both the 9.6 kbps base rate (based on Rate
Set1) or the 14.4 kbps base rate (based on Rate Set 2)
Each radio configuration has associated details such as coding
options, modulation options, and supported data rates that are
defined as part of the IS-2000 physical layer reverse link description.
Signals transmitted on the reverse traffic channel (reverse dedicated
control channel, reverse fundamental channel, reverse supplemental
channel or reverse supplemental code channel) are specified by radio
configurations:
RC1: 1200,2400,4800 and 9600 bps data rates with R=1/3. No pilot
and hence, the use of the 64-ary orthogonal modulation to isolate
data blocks being transmitted by the mobile
RC2: 1800,3600,7200 and 14400 bps data rates with R=1/2. No
pilot and hence, the use of the 64-ary orthogonal modulation to
isolate data blocks being transmitted by the mobile
RC3:
1200,1350,1500,2400,2700,4800,9600,19200,38400,76800
and 153600 bps data rate with R=1/4, 307200 bps data rate with
R=1/2, BPSK modulation with a pilot
RC4: 1800,3600,7200,14400,28800,57600,115200 and 230400 bps
data rates with R=1/4, BPSK modulation with a pilot
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 320 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Link Radio Configurations
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 321 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse link Channels

_________________________________________________________
Reverse link Channels
Given a bandwidth of 1.25 MHz (for spreading rate 1) or 3.75 MHz (for
spreading rate 3), the reverse link consists of various combinations of code
channels which include:
Access Channel
Reverse Pilot Channel
Enhanced Access Channel
Reverse Common Control Channel
Reverse Dedicated Control Channel
Reverse Fundamental Channel
Reverse Supplemental Channel
Reverse Supplemental Code Channel
Signals on the reverse traffic channels (Reverse Dedicated Control,
Reverse Fundamental, Reverse Supplemental and Reverse Supplemental
Code channels) are specified by their Radio Configurations (RCs). There
are six Radio Configurations defined for the reverse traffic channels
A MS shall support Radio Configurations 1,3 or 5 from Rate Set 1
(1200,2400,4800 9600 bps). However, Radio Configurations 2,4 and 6
derived from Rate set2 (1800,3600,7200 and 14400 bps) are optional
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 322 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Link Channels
Given a bandwidth of 1.25 MHz (for spreading rate 1) or 3.75 MHz (for
spreading rate 3), the reverse link consists of various combinations of

code channels which include:
Access Channel
Reverse Supplemental Channel
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 323 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Orthogonal Walsh Codes

_________________________________________________________
When transmitting on the R-PICH, R-EACH, R-CCCH, R-DCCH, R-FCH or
R-SCH traffic with Radio Configurations 3 through 6, the mobile station uses
the following Walsh codes:
W032Enhanced
Access
8
Channel
W2 Reverse Common Control Channel
8
W2 Reverse Dedicated Control Channel
W816Reverse
Fundamental Channel
W416Reverse
Supplemental
Channel-1
W12 or W24Reverse Supplemental Channel-2
W24 or W68
Walsh code WiN represents a Walsh function of Length N that is serially
constructed from the ith row of an NXN Hadamard matrix with zeroth row
being Walsh code zero
So, a code channel that is covered using Walsh function ith from the N-ary
orthogonal set (such as the 64X64 Walsh matrix) shall be assigned Walsh
code WiN (Wi64)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 324 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

When transmitting on the R-PICH, R-EACH, R-CCCH, R-DCCH, R-FCH or R-
SCH traffic with Radio Configurations 3 through 6, the mobile station uses the
following Walsh codes:
W032Enhanced Access Channel
W28Reverse Common Control Channel
W28Reverse
Dedicated Control ChannelW816Reverse Fundamental Channel
W416Reverse Supplemental Channel-1
W12 or W24
Reverse Supplemental Channel-2W24 or W68
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 325 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Gated Transmissions for RC1 and RC2

_________________________________________________________
Gated Transmissions for RC1 and RC2:
When operating with RC1 or 2, the reverse fundamental channel
interleaver output stream is time gated to allow transmissions of some
Interleaver output symbols and deletion of others
The duty cycle of the transmission gate depends on the transmit data rate
For full rate transmission (9600 or 14400 bps), the gate allows all the
interleaver output symbols to be transmitted
For half rate transmissions (4800 or 7200), the gate allows half of the
Interleaver output symbols to be transmitted
The gating process is performed by the Data Burst randomizer (DBR)
The overall objective being to reduce reverse link interference to other
mobiles operating on the same CDMA carrier
When transmitting on the Access Channel, the DBR is not used. Therefore,
both copies of the repeated code symbols are transmitted. (the average
holding time on the access channel is very short by comparison to that on
the traffic channel, so the access state contribution to the reverse link
interference is not potentially as significant)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 326 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Gated Transmission
Several types of Gated transmission strategies are used on the reverse link
depending on the Mode of operation. They include:

Variable data rate transmission on the reverse fundamental channel
with radio configuration 1 and 2 (vocoder driven strategy)
PUF operation on the Reverse Traffic Channel with RC 1 and 2
Gated operation on the Reverse Pilot Channel
Gated operation of the Enhanced Access Channel Pre-amble
Gated operation of the Reverse Common Control Channel Preamble
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 327 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Quadrature Spreading RC1 and RC2

_________________________________________________________
The access channel and the reverse traffic channel with radio configurations 1
and 2 are spread in quadrature as follows:

The direct sequence spreading output (Real after Long code spreading) is
multiplied by a complex short PN spreading sequence
The In-phase and Quadrature components of the short PN have the same
length of (215), the same speed (1.2288 mcps), the same phase but
different generating polynomials
After Quadrature Short PN spreading, the Q-channel data is delayed by
half a PN chip time with respect to the I-channel data
The I-Channel data is mapped from (0,1) to (+,-), Gain-adjusted,
baseband-filtered to BPSK-modulate the cos (real part) of the IF carrier
Likewise, the Q-channel is mapped from (0,1) to (+,-), gain adjusted,
baseband-filtered to BPSK-modulate the sin (imaginary part) of the IF
carrier
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 328 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The access channel and the reverse traffic channel with radio configurations 1
and 2 are spread in quadrature as follows:

The direct sequence spreading output (Real after Long code spreading) is
multiplied by a complex short PN spreading sequence
The In-phase and Quadrature components of the short PN have the same
length of (215), the same speed (1.2288 mcps), the same phase but
different generating polynomials
After Quadrature Short PN spreading, the Q-channel data is delayed by
half a PN chip time with respect to the I-channel data
The I-Channel data is mapped from (0,1) to (+,-), Gain-adjusted,
baseband-filtered to BPSK-modulate the cos (real part) of the IF carrier
Likewise, the Q-channel is mapped from (0,1) to (+,-), gain adjusted,
baseband-filtered to BPSK-modulate the sin (imaginary part) of the IF
carrier
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 329 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
RC Support by Mobile
_________________________________________________________
Forward-Reverse mapping of RC support by Mobile:
A mobile station shall support operation in RC 1,3 or 5. A mobile station
may support operation on RC 2,4, or 6

A mobile station shall not use RC 1 or 2 simultaneously with RC 3 or 4 on
the Reverse Traffic Channel
The Forward Link Radio Configurations are matched to the Reverse Link
Radio configurations as follows:
If MS supports F-FCH with RC1, then it shall support R-FCH with RC1
If the MS supports F-FCH with RC2, the it shall support R-FCH with RC2
If the mobile station supports the F-FCH with RC3 and RC4, then it shall
support R-FCH with RC3
If the mobile station supports F-FCH with RC5, then it shall support the RFCH with RC4
If the mobile station supports the F-DCCH with RC3 or RC4, then it shall
support the R-DCCH with RC3
If the mobile station supports the F-DCCH with RC5, then it shall support
the R-DCCH with RC4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 330 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward-Reverse mapping of RC support by Mobile:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 331 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The R-PICH shall be transmitted when RC 3,4,5, or 6 are enabled. (when
the R-EACH, the R-CCCH, the Reverse Traffic Channel with RC3 through 6
are being used)
The R-PICH is not used for RC1 and RC2 since these configurations must
be compatible with IS-95A/B which are Pilot Less
The R-PICH is only transmitted when the following channels are used:
Revere Common Control Channel
Also transmitted during the preamble of the following channels:
Reverse Fundamental channel
:
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 332 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The reverse pilot channel is used to assist the base station in detecting
mobile station transmissions
Reverse Pilot Channel (R-PICH) [RC>2] is an un-modulated spread

spectrum signal used to assist the Base Station in detecting the Mobile
Stations transmission
The Reverse Pilot channel [RC>2]data shall be spread with Walsh code
W032
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 333 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Channel
_________________________________________________________
Access Channel
The access channel is used by the mobile station to initiate communication
with the base station and to respond to paging channel messages
The reverse access channel (R-ACH) is used by the mobile station on RCs
1 and 2 to initiate communication with the base station and respond to
paging channel messages
Reverse Access channels are identified by their Long Code offsets. They
use Random Access Protocol to transmit probes to the base station. In
order to allow backward compatibility, the access channel is identified to the
access channel specified in IS-95A/B. (The reverse pilot is not used to
support the Access Channel as is the case for reverse enhanced access
channels)
Reverse Access Channel
The reverse link may have up to 32 reverse access channels associated to
one paging channel and information on the access channel is transmitted at
a fixed rate of 4800 bps
The access channel frame starts when the system time is an exact multiple
of 20ms. The mobile station shall delay the transmit timing of a probe by a
random delay of RN PN chips. Where RN is given by the common channel
multiplex sub-layer
The random delay includes the delay of the direct sequences long code of
the Quadrature short PN sequences. So, it effectively increases the
apparent range from the mobile to the base station. (This increases the
probability that the base station isolates and demodulates incoming signals
in the same access channel slot-especially when many mobiles are at a
similar range from the base station)
The access channel pre-amble is transmitted to aid the base station in
acquiring an access channel transmission. It consists of frames of 96 zeros
transmitted at 4800 bps
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 334 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Access Channel

The reverse link may have up to 32 reverse access channels associated to
one paging channel and information on the access channel is transmitted at a
fixed rate of 4800 bps
The access channel frame starts when the system time is an exact multiple of
20ms. The mobile station shall delay the transmit timing of a probe by a random
delay of RN PN chips. Where RN is given by the common channel multiplex
sub-layer
The random delay includes the delay of the direct sequences long code of the
Quadrature short PN sequences. So, it effectively increases the apparent range
from the mobile to the base station
The access channel pre-amble is transmitted to aid the base station in
acquiring an access channel transmission. It consists of frames of 96 zeros
transmitted at 4800 bps
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 335 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Channel
_________________________________________________________
The enhanced access channel (REACH) replaces the access channel for
higher radio configurations. Like access channel, it is used by the mobile

station to get the Base stations attention or to respond to base station
messages in Radio configurations 3-4.
There are three modes of operation of the channel:
Basic Access Mode:
The mobile station does not transmit the Enhanced Access header. An
access probe consists of an Enhanced Access Channel Preamble followed
by data
Power controlled access mode:
Here, an Enhanced Access Channel probe consists of a preamble, the
Enhanced access channel header and the data
Reservation Access mode:
Here, the probe consists of two parts only: The preamble and the Enhanced
Access Channel header. When permission is given for the reservation, the
actual data is transferred using the Reverse Common Control Channel. (In
other words, the R-EACH sets up the R-CCH to do the work)
Reverse Access channels are identified by their Long code offsets covered
by Walsh code W28. They use Random Access Protocol to transmit probes
to the base station. In order to facilitate the detection process at the base
station, the reverse pilot is transmitted during the Enhanced Access
Channel Probe.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 336 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The enhanced access channel is used by the mobile station with RC3
through RC6, to initiate communications with the Base station or to respond

to mobile-directed messages
The enhanced access channel (REACH) replaces the access channel for
higher radio configurations
There are three modes of operation of the channel:
Basic Access Mode
Power controlled access mode
Reservation Access mod
e
Reverse Access channels are identified by their Long code offsets covered
by walsh code W28
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 337 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Enhanced Access Channel

_________________________________________________________
The reverse link may have up to 32 reverse enhanced access channels
associated to one Forward Common Control Channel. (Not to the paging

channel as per IS-95A. The F-CCH takes over the Paging Channel
functions for RC3 thru 6. R-EACH (Not Access channels) are also enabled
for RC3 thru 6. In a way, Paging channels are to access channels what the
F-CCCH are to the R-EACH)
Enhanced Access Channel Headers are transmitted at a fixed rate of 9600
bps while the actual access data is transmitted at a fixed data rate of 9600
bps, 19200 bps or 38400 bps depending on transmission goals (QoS). (For
last access requirements, the 38400 bps data transmission rate may be
used for example)
The frame duration for an Enhanced Access Header shall be 5ms. The
frame duration for the Enhanced Access data shall be 20ms, 10ms or 5ms.
The timing of Enhanced Access Channel transmissions starts on 1.25ms
increments of system time.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 338 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The reverse link may have up to 32 reverse enhanced access channels
associated to one Forward Common Control Channel
Enhanced access channel headers are transmitted at a fixed rate of 9600
bps while the actual access data is transmitted at a fixed data rate of 9600
bps, 19200 bps, or 38400 bps depending on transmission goals (QoS)
The frame duration for an Enhanced Access header shall be 5ms. The
frame duration for the enhanced access data shall be 20ms, 10ms or 5 ms.
The timing of enhanced access channel transmissions starts on 1.25ms
increments of system time
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 339 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
In IS-95A, the Access Channels are complementary to the Paging channel.
There could be up to 32 access channels associated to one Paging Channel
Likewise, the Reverse Common Control Channels (R-CCH) are
complementary to the Forward Common Control (F-CCH). Up to 32 R-CCH
could be associated to a F-CCH. Note that the Forward Common Control
channel is an optimized Paging Channel for higher data rate requirements
(N>3). In these applications, it is used for signalling and user data when
traffic channels are not in use
Just as the F-CCH is an optimized Paging channel, the R-CCH is an
optimized Access channel for higher data rate applications. Each Reverse
Common Control Channel is associated with a single forward common
control channel. Frame sizes of 20ms, 10ms and 5 ms are used
There are two modes of operation for the R-Common Control Channel
Reservation Access Mode
Designated Mode
The reverse link may have up to 32 Reverse Common Control channels
associated to one Forward common control channel and up to 32 reverse
common control channels associated to one Forward Common Assignment
channel. Each reverse common control channel is associated with a single
forward common control channel
The MS transmits on the Reverse common control channel at variable data
rates 9600 bps, 19200 bps and 38400 bps depending on transmission
requirements
The frame duration for an Enhanced Access Header shall be 5 ms. The
frame duration for the enhanced access data shall be 20ms, 10ms or 5ms.
The timing of enhanced access channel transmission starts on 1.25ms
increments of system time
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 340 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

This channel is used for the transmission of user data and signalling
information to the base station when the reverse traffic channels are not in use
Revere common control channel can operate in one of two modes:
Reservation Access mode or
Designated access mode
The MS transmits during designated, reserved, intervals of time specified
by the base station
Reverse common control channels are identified by their Long Code offsets.
They use Random Access Protocol to transmit probes to the base station. In
order to facilitate the detection process at the base station, the reverse pilot is
transmitted during the enhanced access channel probe
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 341 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The reverse dedicated control channel is used to carry user data as well as
signalling and control information while the call is in progress

The reverse traffic channel may contain up to one dedicated control
channel
The Mobile transmits on the reverse dedicated control channel at a fixed
data rate 9600 bps or 14400 bps using 20ms frames or 9600 bps using 5ms
frames
For RCs 3 & 4, the 9600 bps speed is used with 20ms frames. For Radio
configurations 4, the 14400 bps speed is used with 20ms frames
For RC 3 and 4, the 9600 bps speed is used with 5ms frames:
9600 bps with a 20ms frame (RC3)
9600 bps with a 5ms frame (RC3 and RC4)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 342 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The reverse dedicated control channel is used to carry user data as well as
signalling and control information while the call is in progress

The reverse traffic channel may contain up to one dedicated control
channel
The Mobile transmits on the reverse dedicated control channel at a fixed
data rate 9600 bps or 14400 bps using 20ms frames or 9600 bps using 5ms
frames
For RCs 3 & 4, the 9600 bps speed is used with 20ms frames. For Radio
configurations 4, the 14400 bps speed is used with 20ms frames
For RC 3 and 4, the 9600 bps speed is used with 5ms frames:
9600 bps with a 5ms frame (RC3 and RC4)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 343 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The reverse fundamental channel is used to carry voice, signalling and low
rate data during a call. Basically it will operate at low FER (around 1
percent). It supports basic rates of 9.6 kbps and 14.4 kbps and their
corresponding sub-rates (Rate set 1and 2 of IS-95)
The reverse fundamental channel does not operate in a scheduled manner;

thus permitting the mobile station to transmit acknowledgements or short
packets without scheduling. This reduces delay and the processing load due
to scheduling. Its main difference compared to the IS-95 voice channel is
that discontinuous transmission is implemented using repetition coding
rather than gated transmission
Unlike reverse supplemental channels, only one reverse fundamental
channel can be used by the mobile station during a call.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 344 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

The reverse fundamental channel is used to carry voice, signalling and low
rate data during a call. Basically it will operate at low FER (around 1
percent). It supports basic rates of 9.6 kbps and 14.4 kbps and their
corresponding sub-rates (Rate set 1and 2 of IS-95)
The reverse fundamental channel does not operate in a scheduled manner;

thus permitting the mobile station to transmit acknowledgements or short
packets without scheduling. This reduces delay and the processing load due
to scheduling. Its main difference compared to the IS-95 voice channel is
that discontinuous transmission is implemented using repetition coding
rather than gated transmission
Unlike reverse supplemental channels, only one reverse fundamental
channel can be used by the mobile station during a call
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 345 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Data Rates
_________________________________________________________
Reverse Fundamental channel Data Rates
When operating with RC1, the MS transmits on the Reverse fundamental
channel using Rate Set1 variable data rates on a frame-by-frame basis
When operating with RC1 and RC3, the MS transmits on the Reverse
Fundamental Channel using variable data rates derived from Rate Set 1 on
a frame-by-frame basis
1500-2700-4800 and 9600 bps for RC3 (20ms frames and 5ms frames)
This is identical to the Rate Set1 Reverse Traffic channel in IS-95A/B
Fundamental Channel using Rate Set 2 variable data rates on a frame-byframe basis
1800-3600-7200 and 14400 bps for RC2 (20ms frames)
This is identical to the Rate Set 2 Reverse Traffic Channel in IS-95A/B
Note1: RC1,RC2,RC3 and RC4 are defined for SR1, that is with the use of
one 1.25 MHz frequency carrier. RC5 and RC6 are defined for SR3 and
require a BW of three times the basic 1.25MHz block
Note2: While the lower rate config (RC1 & RC2) use 20ms frames, the
higher rate config (RC3 thru RC6) use 5ms frames as well as 20ms frames.
The use of 5ms frames allows fast packet transmission
Note3: The data rate and Frame duration on a Reverse Fundamental
Channel within a RC are selected on a frame-by-frame basis. However, for
data rates below 7200 bps, the modulation symbol rate is kept constant by
the Repetition device
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 346 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Fundamental channel Data Rates

When operating with RC1, the MS transmits on the Reverse fundamental
channel using Rate Set1 variable data rates on a frame-by-frame basis

Fundamental Channel using variable data rates derived from Rate Set 1 on
a frame-by-frame basis
Fundamental Channel using Rate Set 2 variable data rates on a frame-byframe basis
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 347 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Reverse Supplemental Code channel
Reverse supplemental code channels apply only to RC1 & 2 and provide
backward compatibility with IS-95B. They are used to transmit users data to
the base station during a call
When operating with RC1, the MS transmits on the Reverse Supplemental
Code Channel using Rate Set1variable data rates on a frame by frame
basis
1200-2400-4800 and 9600 bps for RC1 (20ms frames only)
This is identical to the Rate Set1 Reverse traffic channel in IS-95A/B
When operating with RC2, the MS transmits on the Reverse Supplemental
Code Channel using Rate Set2 variable data rates on a frame by fame
basis
1800-3600-7200 and 14400 bps for RC2 (20ms frames only)
This is identical to the Rate Set 2 Reverse Traffic channel in IS-95A/B
The reverse traffic channel can simultaneously use (aggregate) up to
seven supplemental code channels in order to enable higher data speeds
on carriers under RC1 and 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 348 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Suuplemental Code Channel

Reverse supplemental code channels apply only to RC1 & 2 and provide
backward compatibility with IS-95B. They are used to transmit users data to
the base station during a call
When operating with
Code Channel using
basis
When operating with
Code Channel using
basis
RC1, the MS transmits on the Reverse Supplemental

Rate Set1variable data rates on a frame by frame
RC2, the MS transmits on the Reverse Supplemental
Rate Set2 variable data rates on a frame by fame
The reverse traffic channel can simultaneously use (aggregate) up to

seven supplemental code channels in order to enable higher data speeds
on carriers under RC1 and 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 349 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 channel summary

________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Channel Summary
List of Forward channels in cdma2000 is given in the page opposite
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 350 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Forward Channel Summary
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 351 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
cdma2000 channel summary

_________________________________________________________
cdma2000 Channel Summary
List of Reverse channels is given in the page opposite
The differences between IS-95 and cdma-2000 is given in the appendix
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 352 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Reverse Channel Summary
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 353 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Switched call Setup

__________________________________________________________
Packet Switched call setup
MS initiates packet data session by an Origination Message to the network.
It is followed by access authentication. The air interface resources for the
packet service are set up using the following steps:
The Radio Setup using messaging defined in the IS-2000 standard
for cdma2000. The MSC-BS call setup using messaging defined in
IS-2001 (IOS). The packet data service connect using messaging
defined in IS-2000 standard for cdma2000. The Radio Link Protocol
(RLP setup using messaging defined in IS-707-A-1.10.
The BS sets up an R-P session with PDSN using messaging defined
in IS-2001 (IOS). The R-P messaging is based on Mobile IP
messaging
After BSC opens R-P interface connection, the PDSN initiates the
PPP link between PDSN and the MS. The link is established and
configuration is negotiated using Link Control Protocol (LCP) RFC
1661.
Following PPP connection the MS initiates a Mobile-IP based
mobility connection with the Home Agent
The Packet data core network authentication procedure is
performed between AAA and either the PDSN or MS. This authorizes
the Mobile user to the PDSN resources to connect to the Internet
Finally, the mobile user is able to exchange packet user traffic with
any entity on the Internet
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 354 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Switched Call Set up
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 355 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Future of cdma2000
__________________________________________________________
Future of cdma2000
Some of the key goals of 3G are build on the success of 2G systems by
offering more voice capacity and supporting packet data services such as
Internet access. Some the services, such as multimedia, require 3G
systems to offer data rates in excess of 2 Mbps
Voice and circuit based services (fax and async data) require low
throughput where as packet data services are asymmetric in nature, where
the demand of the forward link is much greater than the reverse link. The
data services are bursty in nature and can tolerate some degree of latency
Some 3G systems like UMTS and 1x cdma2000 support both voice and
packet data services with the same network and radio interface. 3G systems
such as 1xEV-DO support only data services. 1xEV-DV supports voice and
packet data services by employing the same network and radio interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 356 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Future of cdma2000
3G (IMT-2000) Requirements
Support more voice users
Support voice and data services simultaneously
Support Packet Data Services simultaneously
Support Packet Data Service at 2 Mbps data rate
Voice and high speed packet data impose vastly different requirements
Voice: Low speed, symmetric, low latency, uniform QoS
Packet Data: High burst rates, asymmetric, variable latency, nonuniform QoS
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 357 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Capacities and limitations

__________________________________________________________
Capacities and Limitations of cdma2000 and IS-95
IS-95 wireless networks are deployed in North America and South America and
some parts of Asia. IS-95(cdmaOne) support primarily voice, low rate services
like SMS, 14.4 kbps data services It doesnot support packet-based access to
Internet and other multimedia services.
1xcdma2000 support higher voice capacity and support efficient packet-based
access to Internet services including multimedia services. The data rates in 1x
are limited to 614.4 kbps. So, certain services such as video conferencing are
not possible in 1x systems. Cdma2000 does provide 3x configuration to support
data rates up to 2Mbps. However, the complexity associated with the 3x
configuration has made it practically obsolete even before it is developed
The cdma2000 standard is published as IS-2000 which consists of three
revisions. Rev0 is the baseline version. Rev A enhances Rev0 by defining new
radio channels for paging and spectral efficiency. RevB specifies minor
changes over RevA.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 358 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Capacities and Limitations of cdma2000 and IS-95
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 359 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
__________________________________________________________
Two solutions have been designed for evolution from 1x systems. These are
1xEV-DO (1x Evolution for Data only) and 1xEV-DV(1x evolution for data
and voice). Both solutions are designed for optimized packet data services
and data rates exceeding 2 Mbps
1xEV-DO systems were pioneered by Qualcom. They are known as High
Rate Packet Data (HRPD) systems in 3GPP2 and are defined in the
standard IS-856 in TIA. 1xEV-DO systems are designed as an add-on to 1x
systems. They operate in a separate 1.25 MHz carrier from 1x systems so
service providers are required to dedicate a separate 1.25 MHz carrier for
them. More over 1xEV-DO systems support non-real-time packet data
services only. The mobile terminal uses 1x carrier for voice and circuit data
services and 1xEV-DO carrier for packet data services. 1xEV-DO is not
backward compatible with 1x. That is a separate standard
1xEV-DV systems are designed as evolution to 1x systems. As such, they
work seamlessly with 1x systems. In fact, the standard for 1xEV-DV is
published as IS-2000 Rev C. IS-2000 Rev C is a specification for both
1xEV-DV and 1x systems. 1xEV-DV is 100% backward compatible with 1x
systems.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 360 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 361 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Goals of 1XEV-DV
__________________________________________________________
Goals of 1x EV-DV
The important goal of 1xEV-DV is to support optimized packet data services at
data rates exceeding 2 Mbps. At the same it has to be backward compatible
with the existing 1x systems. Therefore, it is designed to operate in the
1.25MHz channel which is the bandwidth used for 1x systems.
1xEV-DV supports voice and packet data services simultaneously. This is
required to support multimedia and Voice over IP services. This is key
difference between 1xEV-DV and 1xEV-DO systems since 1xEV-DO systems
support only non-real-time data services. For voice services, the service
provider has to rely on 1x systems but 1xEV-DO and 1x systems operate on
different 1.25MHz carriers. Since the mobile terminal is not built to track both 1x
and 1xEV-DO carriers, it cannot support simultaneous voice and high speed
data services. 1xEV-DV systems are built to support voice and packet in the
same 1.25 MHz bandwidth. Therefore, the mobile terminal can obtain
simultaneous voice and packet data services at 2 Mbps from the same carrier.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 362 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Goals of 1x EV-DV
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 363 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DO
_________________________________________________________
Overview of 1x EV-DO
The 1xEV-DO air interface is specially designed to serve non real time
packet data services where the service demand is intermittent and bursty.
One single shared channel is time multiplexed among all the users to
support bandwidth on demand. The 1xEV-DO air interface occupies a 1.25
MHz frequency band, same as IS-95 or cdma2000 1x system. By employing
higher-level modulation (QPSK, 8-PSK and 16-QAM) it is able to deliver
high data rates up to 2 Mbps.
In 1xEV-DO based wireless network, the 1xEV-DO Radio Access Network
(BTS/BSC) does not communicate with MSC.
The 1xEV-DO only terminal will not be able to access circuit switched
services. The hybrid terminal monitors the cdma2000 common channels to
receive paging related messages while exchanging user traffic on 1xEV-DO
system
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 364 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DO
Only for non real-time packet data
Occupies 1.25 MHz frequency (same as cdma2000 1x system) to

deliver>2Mbps data rate
Fixed power variable rate
No connection to MSC (CS-CN)
To PDSN: Type of terminal (cdma2000 or 1xEV-Do) is transparent
Hybrid AT monitors cdma2000 common channels (for possible Page of
SMS) while exchanging data with 1xEV-DO system
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 365 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DV
__________________________________________________________
Overview of 1x EV-DV
1xEV-DV meets IMT2000 data rate requirements by supporting data rates in
excess of 2 Mbps for packet data services. It is backward compatible with the
existing 1x systems It supports voice, real-time data and non-real time data
service in the same 1.25MHz carrier
The data rates 1xEV-DV systems exceed 3MBps for packet data services.
1xEV-DV achieves this by employing spectrally efficient optimizations. But
there is no improvement in voice capacity. The network interfaces including IOS
and IS-41 are minimally impacted by 1xEV-DV. 1xEV-DV retain signalling
mechanisms and call model of 1x systems
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 366 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DV
Support 3G requirements of IMT-2000 while being backward compatible to
1x
Voice, circuit data, packet data (real and non real-time)
Voice and data users simultaneously on a single 1.25MHz band
Enhanced 1x Air Interface
3.09 MBps peak data rate in forward link
Maintains call model of IS-95 and 1x
Spectrally efficient compared to 1x
No/Minimal impact to IOS Packet Interfaces
Voice capacity is same as 1x
No change in reverse link data rates
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 367 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DO Network Architecture

_________________________________________________________
Overview of 1x EV-DO Network Architecture
The diagram given in the next page shows enhancements made to basic 1xEVDO system. These enhancements are required to support access
authentication and interface between two access networks. The AN-AAA server
is added to the access network authentication. The interface between AN-AAA
server and BSC is A12. This interface is based on RADIUS protocol
The interface between BSC of two different access networks is A13. This is an
IP based interface
In addition, the 1xEV-DO network includes A8-A11 interfaces that are defined
as part of basic IOS document.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 368 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Architecture of 1X EV-DO
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 369 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Overview of 1X EV-DV Network Architecture

__________________________________________________________
Overview of 1x EV-DV Network Architecture
The basic architecture is unchanged from 1x systems. The biggest change
is the 1xEV-DV air interface between the mobile station and the BTS/BSC.
The BTSs and the BSC together form the radio network. The circuit
switched network is anchored by the PDSN. It consists of AAA servers, the
HA and FA. The interface between BSC and CN is defined in the IOS. IOS
defines interfaces between BSC to PDSN, BSC to MSC and BSC to BSC in
a series from A1 through A11
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 370 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
EV-DV Architecture
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 371 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
__________________________________________________________
2.5 G solutions provide inherent support for packet data, medium data
rates and a lower cost evolution from 2G than jumping directly to 3G
For CDMA2000 networks the first phase called 1X or 1XRTT(Radio
Transmission Technology) can only get up to 614.4 Kbps max-higher than
GPRS/EDGE.
3G technologies can go as high as 2Mbps and will develop in two phases.
Phase 1 involves high speed packet data operations while still supporting
voice and circuit switched data through the circuit switched core network.
Phase 2 involves purely IP operations, carrying even voice over the IP
network.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 372 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 373 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Migration Paths to 3G
__________________________________________________________
Motorola plans to gradually evolve the network toward a packet IP model.
The following section provide an overview of all the features and services
that will be offered during the phases. Services will continue to be offered
via the existing circuit-based components in addition to the introduction of
the packet based elements
IS95A to IS95B
cdma2000 1X: An evolution of current IS95A/B to increase
voice capacity up to 2 times and increase peak data rates
up to 10 times, achieving 144kbps to 153.6kbps
1XEV-DO (1X Evolved Data Only): An evolution of IS95A/B
and cdma2000 1X systems to offer Data only capabilities
at twice the capacity
1XEV-DV (1X Evolved Data Voice): An evolution of
IS95A/B cdma1X and 1XEV-DO systems to maximize both
peak and rates and data capacity while maintaining the
ability to offer 1X voice services
Data Rates:
CdmaOne
2G: IS95A =14.4 Kbps
2.5G: IS95B=64kbps
3G:
1X:95C:cdma2000:IS2000=144kbps/153.6kbps
1X-EV-DO = 620kbps
1XEV-DV=1.2Mbps
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 374 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 375 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Release Timelines
__________________________________________________________
Release Timelines
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 376 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Release Timelines
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 377 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
1X Network Overview
__________________________________________________________
1X Network Overview
The diagram given in the page opposite details simplified CDMA network.
Each network component is illustrated only once, however, many of the
components will occur several times throughout a network. Each network
component is designed to communicate over an interface specified by SCTM
Motorola protocol. This provides flexibility and enables a network provider to
utilize system components from different manufacturers. For example, a
Motorola BSS equipment may be coupled with a Cisco system
The Principal components of a CDMA network are given below
The Mobile
This consists of the mobile telephone, fax machine etc. This is the part of
the network that the subscriber will see.
The Radio Access Network
This is the part of the network which provides the radio interconnection from
the mobile to the land based switching equipment
The Network Management Center
This enables the network provider to configure and maintain the network
from a central location.
The Switch
This consists of the Mobile Switching Center (MSC). This is the part which
provides for interconnection between the CDMA network and the Public
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
The Intelligent Network (Not Shown)
This supports provisioning of 3G data subscribers
Packet Data Network
This supports evolution towards an IP-based, peer-to-peer network,
providing circuit and packet data components
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 378 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
!X Overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 379 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Mobile Station
__________________________________________________________
The Mobile Station
The mobile is the hardware used by the subscriber to access the cellular
network.
The mobile is programmed with information regarding the service the
subscriber should receive. The subscriber is identified by a Mobile
Identification Number (MIN) or International Mobile Subscriber Identity
(IMSI). This number is unique for the particular device and permanently
stored in it. The IMSI identifies the mobile subscriber. It is only transmitted
over the air during initialization.The MIN enables the network operator to
identify mobile equipment which may be causing problems in the system.
This is the telephone number of the mobile subscriber. It is comprised of a
country code, a network code, and a subscriber number. Calls are routed
and billing is performed based on the identity of the subscriber and its
equipment or its location.
The mobile is capable of operating at a certain maximum power output
dependent on its type and use. The mobile station is the only part of the
CDMA network which the subscriber will really see. There are two main
types of MS, these are listed below.
Vehicle Mounted-These devices are mounted in a vehicle and the
antenna is physically mounted on the outside of the vehicle.
Hand portable Unit-This equipment comprises of a small telephone
handset not much bigger than a calculator. The antenna is connected
to the handset.
1X Mobile Technology
Cellular (824.025-848.985MHz) and PCS bands (1850-1910MHz)
with Spreading Rate 1 (1.25 MHz).
IS95 A/B only 1X only with voice/data
1X with voice only (no data)
IS95 A/B voice/data and 1X voice/data
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 380 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
The Mobile Station
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 381 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Radio Access Network

__________________________________________________________
The key elements of Radio Access Network are
Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC)
Access Network Node (AN)
Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 382 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 383 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Centralized Base station Controller

__________________________________________________________
Centralized Base Station Controller
Introduction
The Centralized Base Station Controller (CBSC) combines the control,
network interface and transcoding functions into one logical entity, the
CBSC. To accomplish this, the CBSC consists of the Transcoder (XC) and
the Mobility Manager (MM) interconnected by the Access Node (AN) and
Token Ring (fiber). The Transcoder primarily provides voice encoding and
decoding functions. The MM provides a high performance, high availability
platform for call processing and mobility management software applications.
Functions
The main functions of the CBSC are:
Manage the radio channels
Transfer signaling information to/from mobile stations
Speech encoding and decoding
Control of the BTS and XC components
Perform call processing and mobility management
Perform operations and maintenance
Each CBSC can support 1-150 BTSs
One CBSC and all of the BTSs under its control make up a Base
Station System (BSS)
Mobility Manager (MM)
The MM provides the central processing unit for the CBSC. It also supports
several I/O protocols that are used to communicate with the other entities in
the system. Call processing and operations and maintenance software is
executed on the MM. It is a main component in the system overload control
strategy. The MM provides the radio channel control functions and all call
setup and teardowns via software loaded on this platform. The channel
control software works in conjunction with the call processing software in the
MSC.
Circuit Inter-Working Unit (IWU)
The circuit IWU in Motorolas CDMA architecture provides the subscriber
the ability to exchange asynchronous data, Quick Net Connect, and
facsimile transmission. The IWU is attached to the XC and becomes an
integral part of the CBSC. CDMA data transmissions provide superior
accuracy. It utilizes two error correction and retransmission protocols, Radio
Link Protocol (RLP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), which
guarantee error free delivery of data. The various data services, such as
rate selection, are initiated as service options during call setup. The IWUs
digital modems support the V.42 protocol, which provides (flow control) rate
adaptation to the landline modems. The IWU supports synchronous and
asynchronous data services, which emulate a traditional modem connection
to the PSTN.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 384 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CBSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 385 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Transcoder
__________________________________________________________
Transcoder (XC)
The transcoder provides variable rate vocoder speech coding/decoding for
calls as specified in IS-95. The transcoder serves as an interface to circuitbased networks such as the MSC, Circuit IWU, and circuit-based
CBSCs.The main functions of the XC are:
Transcoding of voice (Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) to/from Code
Excited Linear Predictive (CELP). Transcoding function supports the
physical channel conversion of PCM from the MSC to CELP for the
BTS
Span line termination for subrate circuit BTS connections
Switching of voice traffic between BTS sites, the internal transcoder
functionality and the MSC
Soft handoff selection function for circuit traffic Packet Subrate
Interface (PSI). Controls handoffs between cells or sectors
Support for 16Kbps SC Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit (STRAU)
frame sub-rate timeslot packaging
Maintains correct RF output power levels for each mobile station
Circuit switching of BTS signaling/control and data
Combining of multiple voice paths during soft handoff, called frame
selection. Found only in CDMA systems
Support legacy inter-CBSC soft handoff connectivity to Motorola
circuit-based CBSCs
Provide connectivity to the Circuit IWU for circuit data calls, including
Quicknet Connect calls
The BTS provides the air interface to the mobile station. BTSs can be used
in omni, 3 or 6 sector configurations.
Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio (OMC-R)
The OMC-R provides operation and maintenance for up to 8 CBSCs. The
three types management are possible
:Database Management
Fault Management
Performance Management
Universal Network Operations (UNO)
UNO provides a centralized point from which operators have access to the
data and interfaces needed for network administration. UNO uses Graphical
User Interfaces (GUIs) to manage cellular networks. UNO focuses on three
management areas:
Status Management
Alarm Management
Performance Management
System Monitoring Application Processor (SMAP)
SMAP is a tool for the optimization of new or existing CDMA networks, as it
maximizes your current systems performance. Through a logical GUI,
SMAP helps you monitor system RF performance, enabling you to optimize,
maintain and troubleshoot your CDMA system.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 386 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
CBSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 387 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Node
__________________________________________________________
Access Node (AN)
Overview
The Access Node (AN) is a key element introduced in system release
G16.0. It serves as the transport focal point to interconnect the local
network elements within the RAN for delivery of control and bearer traffic.
The AN provides a BTS span aggregation point and enables packet
switching between CBSC network elements. Standard routing protocols
track all possible paths through the network. Via routing table updates, the
routing protocol continually tracks the most efficient path to the network
destination. The AN is capable of terminating various physical interfaces
including 10/100BaseT ethernet and gigabit ethernet interfaces.The AN is
comprised of the following:
Aggregation Node (AGNODE) - Cisco MGX8850 multiservice Switch
is responsible for the aggregation of a large number of backhaul span
lines.
Multi Layer Switch (MLS) - Cisco CAT6509 multilayer LAN switches,
or IP switch, is a layer 2 (Datalink)/layer 3 (Network) switched
Ethernet router responsible for the routing of all control, bearer, and
O&M traffic within the IP RAN.
The main functions of the AN are:
BTS span aggregation point
Routing of all control, bearer, and O&M traffic within the IP RAN
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 388 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Access Node
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 389 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Base Transceiver Station

__________________________________________________________
The BTS provides the air interface connection with the Mobile Station.
Contains RF Hardware
Limited Control Functionality
Each BTS will support omni (1), 3 or 6 cells/sectors.
Configurations
CBSCs may control several BTSs, the maximum number of BTSs which
may be controlled by one CBSC is not specified by CDMA. Individual
manufacturers specifications may vary greatly. Motorolas maximum
number of BTSs is 150.
The BTSs and CBSC may either be located at the same cell site Colocated, or located at different sites Remote. In reality, most BTSs will be
remote, as there are many more BTSs than CBSCs in a network.
Another BTS configuration is the Daisy Chain. A BTS need not
communicate directly with the CBSC which controls it, it can be connected
to the CBSC via a chain of BTSs. Daisy chaining reduces the amount of
cabling required to set up a network as a BTS can be connected to its
nearest BTS rather than all the way to the CBSC.
Problems may arise when chaining BTSs, due to the transmission delay
through the chain. The length of the chain, must, therefore, be kept
sufficiently short to prevent the round trip speech delay becoming too long.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 390 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
BSS Configurations
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 391 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
1X BTS
__________________________________________________________
1X Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
Motorolas BTS portfolio for cdma2000 1X includes the SC4812T series and
the SC300 series BTS platforms. The SC4812T family includes the indoor
SC4812T, the outdoor 2-cabinet/4-carrier SC4812ET, and the SC4812ET
Lite, an outdoor two-carrier minicell. The SC300 series is Motorolas
microcell and picocell solution for cdma2000 1X. Simple FRU, field
replaceable unit, facilitates the migration to cdma2000 1X or to future
cdma2000 air interface technologies.
Supporting BTSs
The following frame types will support cdma2000 1X capability:
SC300
SC4812T
SC4812ET
SC4812 Expansion Frame
SC4812ET Lite (New)
Local Maintenance Facility (LMF)
Computer using Windows graphical user interface (GUI) for:Initial
optimization/calibration/ATPs of BTSPerform maintenance on BTSThe
upgraded LMF will provide calibration of the devices while the site remains
in - service. For this purpose:
Directional couplers must be installed in-line with the RF paths at
each site.
Sites equipped with RFDS will have directional couplers installed.
Sites already equipped with RFDS will need to be upgraded to
become 1X compatible
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 392 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
1X BTS
BTSsSC300SC4812TSC4812ETSC4812ET Lite
BTS
Support-LMF
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 393 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Data network

__________________________________________________________
Packet Data Network

Why a PDN?
The purpose of the Packet Data Network (PDN) is to provide connectivity for
subscribers accessing servers and applications that reside on the
Operators internal IP network, that reside in external private networks (e.g.
external corporate intranets), and that reside in the external public ISP
networks. The operators IP network resembles an Internet Service
providers (ISP) network with the addition of some key network elements
that are specifically designed to enable mobile, wireless Internet access
from CDMA RANs.
Those key network elements are:
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) Server
Home Agent (HA) Routers
The diagram illustrates the logical network model for the IP network, which
is compliant with the Wireless IP Network reference model described
TR45.6 or IS-835 specifications.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 394 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 395 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Data Serving Node

_________________________________________________________
The PDSN is introduced in G16.0. It provides the interface between the
CBSC, specifically the packet control function (PCF) and the Data Network.
For a Mobile-IP system, the PDSN supports the functions of Mobile IP
Foreign Agent and facilitates the authentication of the mobile station (MS)
as specified in the Mobile IP standard. So far, two types of PDSNs have
been selected:
3com Model TC1000 (shown)
Cisco Model 7206
With the Motorola architecture, the operator shall enjoy the integration of all
previous packet data functionality on the PDSN. This includes support of IS95A and IS-95B data services. In the case of CDMA Circuit Switched Data,
the current Circuit Data inter-working unit (IWU) is required for each CBSC.
The PDSN is suitable for both facilities with current deployed packet IWU
installations as well as a build out of new packet data capability. The PDSN
is interoperable with existing packet IWU devices and corresponding
RADIUS AAA servers while providing increased access rates and additional
aggregate data capacity for packet data subscribers over current packet
IWU capabilities. For installations where the PDSN replaces circuit IWU
functionality the PDSN provides this functionality without increasing the load
on the MSC. The PDSN is only applicable to CDMA systems and applies to
packet data calls.
A PDSN can handle the data calls of several CBSCs. It is logically
connected to the PSI-PCF (Packet Control Function) of the CBSC, via the
AN, and can be connected with up to 200 PSI-PCFs. A 100BaseT Ethernet
connects the PDSN to the CBSCs via Access Node (AN). The Ethernet
connection provides the capability to connect multiple CBSCs to a single
PDSN or have multiple PDSNs supporting a single CBSC. In addition to the
packet forwarding, the PDSN performs subscriber authentication and
collects accounting data and forwards it to the accounting server. The
authentication is performed during the PPP negotiation that occurs between
the PDSN and the mobile station. The network of PDSNs is responsible for
ensuring that all traffic addressed to an MS is correctly delivered. Data can
be received either from external IP Networks or from other PDSNs in the
Mobile Operators Data Network. This is accomplished by using the concept
of a " Home Agent " and a " Foreign Agent ". All traffic destined for a MS is
automatically routed to the MS's " Home Agent " as though the MS were
attached to the " Home Agent ". The " Home Agent " encapsulates the data
and forwards it to the current serving Foreign Agent or PDSN, where it is
de-encapsulated and transferred to the MS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 396 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
PDSN
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 397 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
AAA Server
_________________________________________________________
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA) Server

The AAA Server is also introduced in G16.0 and provides authentication,
authorization and accounting services.
Authentication is the verification of a subscribers identity through a
verification of per-determined credentials such as user id and
password.
Authorization is the determination of access privileges to networks or
network services based on the authenticated identity of a requester.
Accounting involves the collection and correlation of resource usage
for the purpose of billing, auditing, cost allocation or performance
analysis.
To minimize the possibility of fraudulent usage, a subscriber authentication
mechanism is typically required for a Packet Data Network. The
authentication mechanism consists of a two-part authentication procedure.
1.The subscribers mobile station is authenticated to ensure that the
subscriber has a valid mobile.2.Then authentication of the subscribers data
terminal equipment.
This allows the network to verify that the user has established data services
and to allow the Service Provider to perform accounting/billing for network
services provided.
As the subscriber begins the air interface data access procedures, the
mobile station is authenticated from the MSC/VLR/HLR using a modification
of existing authentication procedures.
At the successful conclusion of this authentication sequence, the data
communication device is authenticated utilizing methods defined in either
the Mobile IP or Simple IP specification.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 398 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
AAA Server
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 399 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Home Agent
_________________________________________________________
Home Agent (HA)
The Home Agent (HA), also introduced in G16.0, is a separate network
element within the PDN that enables mobility management for:
Mobile IP subscribers
Simple IP subscribers
The Home Agent maintains the location of the mobile through mobile
registrations and forwards or redirects data (packets) to the Foreign Agent
(internal to the PDSN) where the mobile is currently registered.
Introduced in G16.0, the Home Agent (HA) is a mobility agent located in the
home network that provides routing functionality for registered mobile
stations. The HA maintains the network attachment location information of a
mobile station, which is known as mobility binding. Also, the HA tunnels
packets destined for a mobile while the mobile is attached to a visitor
network. Mobiles that support Mobile IP functionality are assigned a HA and
a home IP address which they are known to other mobiles and applications
on the Internet or Intranet. The Home IP address allows other mobile
devices and applications to reach the mobile while the mobile is connected
to the network. Mobile IP utilizes the HA to track the location of the mobile
when it roams out of the home network, and for-wards the Home Agent to
the Foreign Agent serving the mobile. The PDSN will support Simple IP
registration with a HA for Simple IP capable mobiles to facilitate mobility
across different PDSN serving areas within the same Access Network.
When the mobile is not in the home network, it will register with the serving
PDSN or Foreign Agent (FA). The mobile looks at advertisements from local
routers to deter-mine whether the serving PDSN supports the options
required by the mobile. Once this is determined, the mobile will send a careof-address issued by the PDSN called a collocated care-of-address, or it
can use the FAs IP address, referred to as the foreign agent care-ofaddress. If Mobile IP is supported by the mobile host, then it will register on
the HA with the care-of-address from the FA and the options it would like for
it registration. If Simple IP is supported by the mobile host, the FA serving
the mobile host will register with the HA. For G16.0 Cisco routers will be
used to implement the HA function, and will be connected via an IP network
to the PDSN. The HA is expected to have a capacity of 1 million packets per
second, which will include 1500 FA/HA tunnels, or 225,000 bindings.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 400 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Home Agent
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 401 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Network Operations and Maintenance Description

_________________________________________________________
Network Operations and Maintenance Description:
The Network Operations and Maintenance solution for the cdma2000 1X
network is an integration of OMC building blocks each of which was
designed and developed to serve the specific needs of the elements of its
domain. Through integration efforts Motorola and its partners are able to
provide a distinct advantage in operability and cost of operations, over other
competing solutions. The key components of this solution are:
OMC-R
OMC-IP
UNO
With the integration of packet based architectures of IP within the
traditionally circuit based architectures of mobile systems a new paradigm of
network management is being created. These two technologies have
management methodologies that are different in many ways and this new
combination will most likely require changes in the methodologies of the
organizations that have traditionally supported them.
In order to facilitate customers in adapting to the changes that are expected,
Motorola and its partners are offering a management solution that strives to
provide the best mixture of the management styles of Telecommunication
and IP.
The most significant offering is the integration of the alarm, trap, and event
streams of all of the managed devices into a single data stream for the
operator.
Integrated device configuration schema allows provisioning tasks that
impact both the radio and the packet network, to be executed from a single
location with a minimal number of user actions. The operator can access all
of the applications needed to do his job from a single users station.
This is achieved by utilization of consistent hardware and operating systems
across the various products of the OMC, and by endorsing the utilization of
web based applications wherever possible.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 402 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 403 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Operations and Maintenance Center - Radio

_________________________________________________________
Operations and Maintenance Radio (OMC-R)
The OMC-R is a highly available UNIX-based O&M platform that supports
the core components of the CDMA Radio Access Network (RAN), including
the Central Base Site Controller (CBSC), the Base Transceiver Stations
(BTS), and Internet Protocol (IP) components for circuit and packet
networks. The OMC-R acts primarily as a data collection and mediation
device for alarms, events, statistics, and configuration.The main functions of
the OMC-R are:
Repository of software images and configuration databases
Control and status of the RAN elements
Controls the execution of RFDS loopback and forward/reverse
power tests
Temporary storage of performance management and call detail log
data
Collection of alarms and event data
Operations and Maintenance Internet Protocol (OMC-IP)
The Operations and Maintenance Center IP, or OMC-IP, is a new
introduction to the CDMA Network Operations, Planning and Optimization
solution for the cdma2000 1X initial deployment in system release G16.0.
The OMC-IP is a logical suite of functionality that consists of an integrated
solution of Sun Microsystems server platforms, Cisco element managers,
Motorola software and other third party applications.
The primary function of this OMC-IP is to provide Element Management
capabilities for the Cisco technology domains including Layer 2 (Datalink)
switching and Layer 3 (Network) Internet Protocol (IP) enabling components
of the cdma2000 1X Access Node (AN), Packet Data Service Node (PDSN),
AAA and HA.The Cisco element management systems are mature
commercial products with added mobile wireless features. The two primary
components of this solution are:
Cisco Systems Cisco WanManager (CWM)
CiscoWorks for Mobile Wireless (CW4MW).
These two pieces of software provide for the customer the element
management control needed to manage and troubleshoot the Cisco network
elements that make mobile IP a possibility in the cdma2000 1X
solutions.These software components also provide the integration with
Motorolas Radio Access Network (RAN) management solutions (OMC-R
and UNO) needed to make the management of this new architecture an
easier task for the cellular network operator
.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 404 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Network Operations and Maintenance
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 405 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Universal Network Operations

_________________________________________________________
Universal Network Operations (UNO)
The Motorola Universal Network Operations (UNO) system is an open
network management system designed to provide the centralized point from
which operators have access to the data and interfaces needed for network
administration.UNOs user interfaces are standards based Graphical User
Interfaces (GUIs) built upon the latest technologies, including websupporting JAVA applications.The management areas that UNO is focused
on are
Device status management
Alarm management
Performance management
Configuration management
Additional UNO applications support operators in tasks as diverse as
access to on-line system documentation, RFDS loop-back test scheduling
and analysis, element software distribution, Call Final Class (CFC) analysis,
load analysis for element processors, etc.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 406 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Network Operations and Maintenance
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 407 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Motorola cdma2000 network Migration

_________________________________________________________
Motorola cdma2000 1X network Migration
Motorolas cdma2000 1X implementation is based upon a migration strategy
that leverages operators investments in IS-95A/B infrastructure. Future
demands are dictating the coexistence of IS-95A/B and cdma2000 1X
systems.
Motorolas solution for cdma2000 1X includes a graceful migration from IS95A/B to cdma2000 1X that integrates existing circuit based equipment
within a new IP based architecture. Motorolas cdma2000 1X solution is an
IP Radio Access Network (RAN) connected to an IP Packet Data Network
(PDN). This architecture incorporates existing 2G components into a new IP
packet-based transport network. New components are added to support the
IP transport network and connections to other packet data networks.
IP-RAN
The IP packet-based approach offers a flexible architecture with significant
growth capabilities and a graceful integration into other networks. The IP
architecture is highly scalable and offers reduced costs compared to other
technologies. The open interface nature of IP allows for ease of integration
of future network elements and services. In addition, the IP architecture
allows the network to more closely follow the performance curves of
worldwide IP development efforts.
Motorolas migration strategy to an IP RAN integrates the IP components
with minimal risk and minimal disruption to the existing 2G voice centric
network. Current investments in voice services are protected while the
operator gains experience with new packet services. This is accomplished
by first adding new IP components to support new 1X data capabilities and
services to the existing 2G network. Once the IP transport network is fully
integrated and proven stable voice and 2G services are moved over to the
IP transport network thereby completing the migration from a subrate circuit
architecture to an IP architecture. This approach is achieved by system
releases G16.0 and G16.1.
System release G16.0 is a full cdma2000 1X solution that has minimal
impact to existing voice and 2G services. Voice and 2G services remain on
a subrate circuit transport network while new 1X data services are
integrated into the network over a new IP transport network.
Release G16.0
1.5 to 2 times voice capacity increase over IS-95A/B
User data rates of up to 144Kbps
Enable new revenue generating services such as Internet web access and
Multimedia
Minimize risks to existing services such as voice
Introduce packet components-IP-RAN-Packet Data Network
Investment protection by re-using existing equipment within the G16
architecture
Up to 1800 Erlangs per CBSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 408 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
G 16.0 System Diagram
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 409 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
APPENDIX A
Data Burst Randomization Algorithm
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 410 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
The data burst randomizer uses a block of 14 bits used in the long code .
These 14 bits are from the long code spreading bits used in the last but one
Power control Group. To put it differently, these bits ocur exactly one PCG
before the boundary of every Reverse Traffic frame.
Let the 14 bits be b0...........b13 .
Here, b0 and b13 are the oldest and earliest bits respectively.
The randomization algorithm used depends on the data rate, as described
below:
Full Rate ( 9600 ):
o All the 16 PCGs are active.
Half Rate ( 4800 )

o Only 8 out of the 16 PCGs are active. The following rule
applies:
o PCG no. = b0;b1 + 2; b2 + 4; b3 + 6
b4 + 8;b5 + 10; b6 + 12;b7 + 14.
Quarter Rate ( 2400 ):

o Only 4 of the 16 PCGs are active. The following rule
applies.
o PCG no. = b0 if b8 is 0 or b1 + 2 if b8 is 1
b2 + 4 if b9 is 0 or b3 + 6 if b9 is 1
b4 + 8 if b10 is 0 or b5 + 10 if b10 is 1
b6 + 12 if b11 is 0 or b7 + 14 if b11 is 1
One-Eighth Rate ( 1200 )

Only 2 of the 16 PCGs will be active. The following rules apply.
PCG No. =b0 if b8 and b12 = 0 or b1 + 2 if b8 = 1,b12 = 0
b2 + 4 if b9 = 0, b12 = 1 or b3 + 6
if b9 = 1,b12 = 1
b4 + 8 if b11 = 0,b13 = 0 or b5 + 10
if b10 =1,b13 = 0
b6 + 12 if b11 = 0, b13 = 1 or b7 + 14
if b11 =1,b13 = 1
The PCGs that will be acive for the different data rates for b0 to b13
combination given below as an example are shown in the diagram opposite.
b0 b1
1 0 0
b2
1
b3
1
b4
1
MOTOROLA LTD.2003
b5
0
b6
1
b7
1
b8
0

Bangalore, India
b9
1
b10 b11 b12 b13

00 1
Page 411 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
b0 to b13 are assumed to be : 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 b0

b13
10
11
12
13
14
9600
4800
2400
1200
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 412 / 425
15
Issue II Rev 4
APPENDIX B
CALL PROCESSING IMPORTANT
PARAMETERS
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 413 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
Important Parameters
ACC_CHANS
Number of Access channels supported by the current paging channel. (stored
in mobiles temporary memory)
ACC_MSG_SEQS
Last received access parameter message sequence number.
CURR_ACC_MSG_SEQ
Current Access parameter message sequence number.
CDMACHS
The CDMA channel number currently used by the mobile.
CHAN_LST_MSG_SEQ
CDMA channel list message sequence number.
CONFIG_MSG_SEQ
Current message sequence number for the System Parameters Message,
Neighbour list message, CDMA channel list message, Extended system
Parameters message and Global Redirection message.
MAX_REQ_SEQ
Maximum number of access probe sequences for an Access channel request.
(1-15)
MAX_RSP_SEQ
Maximum number of access probe sequences for an Access channel response.
( 1-16 )
MAX_SLOT_CYCLES
Maximum value of slot cycle index allowed by the current base station.
MIN_P_REVS:
Minimum mobile station PROTOCOL revision level that is required for the
mobile to access the CDMA system.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 414 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
MSG_REQ_ACKS
Next message sequence number for messages requiring acknowledgment.
MSG_SEQ+NOACKS
Next message sequence number for messages that DO NOT require an
acknowledgment.
NGHBR_CONFIGS
Neighbour base station channel allocation
NGHBR_PNS
Neighbour base station Pilot Channel PN sequence offset in units of 64 PN
chips.
NIDS
Network identification.
PAGECHS
Current Paging Channel number
PAGE_CHANS
Number of Paging channels supported by the current CDMA channel.
PILOT_PNS
Pilot PN sequence offset for a base station, in units of 64 chips.
PRATS
Data rate of the Paging Channel
P_REVS
Protocol revision supported by the base station.
PWR_REP_FRAMESS
Power control reporting frame count; The number of frames over which the
mobile has to count frame errors. ( 1-15 )
PWR_REP_THRESHOLDS
Power control reporting threshold; The number of bad frames ( 1- 32 ) to be
received in a measurement period before the mobile generates a Power
Measurement Report Message.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 415 / 425
Issue II Rev 4

_________________________________________________________
PWR_STEPS
Power increment for successive access probes.
SIDS
System Identifier
SID_NID_LISTS
The SID/NID pair in which the mobile is registered.
SLOT_CYCLE_INDEXS
Equal to SLOT_CYCLE_INDEXP OR the received maximum slot cycle index,
WHICHEVER is SMALLER.
SLOT_NUM
Paging channel Slot number
SRCH_WIN_AS
Search window size for the ACTIVE SET and the CANDIDATE sets. (These
sets will be explained shortly).
SRCH_WIN_NS
Search window size for the Neighbour set.
SRCH_WIN_RS
Search window size for the Remaining set.
SYS_PAR_MSG_SEQ
System parameters Message sequence number.
SYS_TIMES
Current value of the CDMA system time as received in the Sync Channel
Message.
T_ADDS
Pilot Detection Threshold.
T_COMPS
Active Vs Candidate set comparison threshold.
T_DROPS
Pilot Drop Threshold.
TOT_FRAMESS :
Total number of frames received; counted for forward channel power control.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 416 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
APPENDIX C
IS-95 VS cdma2000
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 417 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Phisical Channels
Deployment of Configurations
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 418 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Packet Data Support
Services Support
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 419 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Frames and Encoding
Power Control
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 420 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Other Differences
High Speed Packet Data
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 421 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Spectral Efficiency
The cdma2000 uses both convolutional and turbo encoders. Convolutional

encoders used for voice and for data rates of up to 14.4 kbps. For high-speed
data, turbo encoders are preferred.
IS-95B power control was based on the assumption that CDMA was limited by
capacity and interference on the reverse link. As a result IS-95B supports fast
closed loop power control (800 power control commands per sec) in the
reverse direction only. The power control for the forward direction is much
slower (50 or fewer times per second). But forward link is the limiting factor for
capacity because of the high powered base stations. In cdma2000, a fast
forward closed loop power control scheme is introduced to address this
problem. Forward link power control is done at the rate of 800Hz, the same rate
as the reverse link fast power control scheme.
Collisions occur when multiple mobiles transmit over the same access channel
in IS-95B. Each time there is a collision, the MS increases its transmit power.
This results in increased interference, which reduces the capacity of the cell.
The cdma2000 introduces the concept of reservation during system access to
avoid the problem of collision.
The cdma2000 introduces reverse pilot channels to enhance the reverse link
performance. IS-95B does not have a pilot channel in the reverse direction.
Reverse pilot channels enable the base stations to coherently demodulate
signals the MSs, which in turn helps in reducing the transmit power
requirements of the mobile stations.
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 422 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 423 / 425
Issue II Rev 4
Notes
MOTOROLA LTD.2003

Bangalore, India
Page 425 / 425

Cdma 02 Finalsdda

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Cdma 02 Finalsdda

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Issue II Rev 4

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Wireless Local Loop

Multiple Access Methods

Concepts of Spread Spectrum Techniques

Basic Model of Anti Jamming System

Capacity of CDMA Systems

Applications of Spread Spectrum Systems

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Wireless Local Loop

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Local Loop and Wireless Local Loop

Wireless Local Loop:

Local Loop: Made

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Wireless Local Loop

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Advantages of the WiLL

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiple Access Methods

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiple Access Methods

N Users / Wideband Channel

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concepts of Spread Spectrum Techniques

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concepts of Spread Spectrum Techniques

Spread Spectrum is basically an ANTI-JAMMING system

Only finite power components of signal are affected by jammer. So,

N is made large by spreading the signal spectrum through:

Direct Sequence Spreading is used in commercial CDMA systems

The spreading is done by multiplying the signal with a Pseudo random

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Basic Model of Anti Jamming System

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Basic Model of Anti Jamming System

The above could be expressed in dBs as Follows:

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

More Channels per carrier as against 8 in GSM

Lower transmit powers for the handsets.

Better performance in Fading/ Interference prone

Ease of Frequency Planning:

CDMA02: Principles of CDMA

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY